Hardware reference guide

ManualsBrandsSchneider Automation ManualsComputer equipmentModicon Quantum Ethernet

35013379 02

Modicon Quantum

Automation Series

Hardware Reference Guide

October 2007 eng

This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., Inc. 800-473-9123 www.barr-thorp.com

Summary of content (900 pages)

PAGE 1
Modicon Quantum Automation Series Hardware Reference Guide 35013379 02 October 2007 eng This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., Inc. 800-473-9123 www.barr-thorp.
PAGE 2
35013379 02 October 2007 This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., Inc. 800-473-9123 www.barr-thorp.
PAGE 3
Table of Contents Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 About the Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Part I Quantum Automation System Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Chapter 1 Modicon Quantum Automation System Overview . . . . . . . . . 17 At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 4
Part III Quantum System Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Chapter 4 System Specifications for the Quantum Module . . . . . . . . . . 55 Quantum System Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Part IV Quantum Module Specifications and Configuration . . . 59 At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 5
Chapter 8 Quantum Field Bus Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140CRP81100 Profibus DP Master Communications Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140EIA92100 Quantum AS-i Master Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140NOA6XXXX Quantum InterBus Communications Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . 140NOL911X0 Quantum LonWorks Network Option Modules . . .
PAGE 6
Chapter 15 15.1 15.2 15.3 Chapter 16 Quantum Intrinsically Safe Analog/Digital, Input/Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417 At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417 Intrinsically Safe Modules - General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418 Intrinsically Safe Modules – General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 7
18.4 18.5 18.6 18.7 140ACO13000 High Density Analog Out I/O Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140AVO02000 Quantum I/O Analog Voltage Out Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analog Input/Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuration of the 140AMM09000 Analog Input/Output Module . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 8
18.8 18.9 Appendices I/O Configuration for the Discrete Verified Output Module – 140DVO85300 . . 701 140DVO85300 I/O Verified 10-30 VDC Out Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 706 Discrete Supervised Input Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 710 At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 710 I/O Configuration for the Discrete Supervised Input Module – 140DSI35300 . .
PAGE 9
Appendix E CableFast Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 797 At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Features of the CableFast Cabling System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 CFA 040 00 Quantum CableFast Cabling Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 CFB 032 00 Quantum CableFast Cabling Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 10
35013379 02 October 2007 This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., Inc. 800-473-9123 www.barr-thorp.
PAGE 11
Safety Information § Important Information NOTICE Read these instructions carefully, and look at the equipment to become familiar with the device before trying to install, operate, or maintain it. The following special messages may appear throughout this documentation or on the equipment to warn of potential hazards or to call attention to information that clarifies or simplifies a procedure.
PAGE 12
Safety Information PLEASE NOTE Electrical equipment should be installed, operated, serviced, and maintained only by qualified personnel. No responsibility is assumed by Schneider Electric for any consequences arising out of the use of this material. © 2006 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 12 35013379 02 October 2007 This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., Inc. 800-473-9123 www.barr-thorp.
PAGE 13
About the Book At a Glance Document Scope This manual is a reference guide for the hardware of the Quantum automation system. Validity Note The data and illustrations found in this book are not binding. We reserve the right to modify our products in line with our policy of continuous product development. The information in this document is subject to change without notice and should not be construed as a commitment by Schneider Electric.
PAGE 14
About the Book 14 35013379 02 October 2007 This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., Inc. 800-473-9123 www.barr-thorp.
PAGE 15
Quantum Automation System Overview I At a Glance Overview This part provides an overview of the Quantum Automation System. What's in this Part? This part contains the following chapters: Chapter 1 Chapter Name Page Modicon Quantum Automation System Overview 15 35013379 02 October 2007 This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., Inc. 800-473-9123 17 www.barr-thorp.
PAGE 16
Quantum Overview 16 35013379 02 October 2007 This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., Inc. 800-473-9123 www.barr-thorp.
PAGE 17
Modicon Quantum Automation System Overview 1 At a Glance Introduction This chapter provides an overview of the Modicon Quantum Automation System, which includes Modicon Quantum software support.
PAGE 18
Modicon Quantum Overview Modicon Quantum Automation Series Overview Overview The Modicon Quantum system is a special-purpose computing system with digital processing capabilities. Modicon Quantum is designed for real time control in industrial and manufacturing applications in a modular, expandable architecture employing the following modules.
PAGE 19
Modicon Quantum Overview Quantum Power Supplies Overview Quantum power supplies are used to supply system power to all modules inserted into the backplane, including: z z z Quantum CPU modules Quantum Interface modules Quantum I/O modules Depending upon the system configuration, the option exists of using the power supply in three different modes. Power Supply Modes The following table shows the power supply modes.
PAGE 20
Modicon Quantum Overview Quantum CPU Modules Overview The Quantum CPU is a module residing on the Quantum local I/O backplane. The CPU is a digitally operating electronic system, which uses a programmable memory for the internal storage of user instructions. These instructions are used to implement specific functions such as: z z z z z Logic Process sequencing Timing Coupling Arithmetic These instructions allow control through digital and analog outputs, for various types of machines and processes.
PAGE 21
Modicon Quantum Overview Quantum I/O Modules Overview Quantum I/O modules are electrical signal converters that convert signals to and from field devices to a signal level and format, which can be processed by the CPU, such as: z z z z z Limit switches Proximity switches Temperature sensors Solenoids Valve actuators All I/O modules are optically isolated to the bus, ensuring safe and trouble-free operation. All I/O modules are also software configurable.
PAGE 22
Modicon Quantum Overview Quantum Communication Interface Modules Overview Nine types of communication interface modules are available and presented in the table below, and are described in the following text. Network Interface Modules The following table shows the communication interface modules. Type Description RIO Single and dual channel Remote I/O interface modules (RIO heads and drops) connected via a coaxial cable network.
PAGE 23
Modicon Quantum Overview RIO Modules (CRA/CRP) Quantum RIO head and drop modules use a S908-based networking I/O configuration. Communication is done via single or dual coaxial cabling up to 15,000 feet away. This configuration supports a mix of the following product lines: z z z z z SY/MAX 200 Series 500 Series 800 Series Quantum I/O When Quantum RIO is required, the Quantum controller may support up to 31 RIO drops.
PAGE 24
Modicon Quantum Overview InterBus Interface Module (NOA) The Quantum InterBus is the interface module to the InterBus bus. The InterBus bus is a fieldbus network designed for I/O blocks and intelligent devices used in manufacturing. It offers a master/slave topology that permits deterministic I/O servicing over it’s 13 km twisted pair network. LonWorks Modules (NOL) Quantum NOL modules provide connectivity between a Quantum controller and a LonWorks network, based on Echelon’s LonWorks technology.
PAGE 25
Modicon Quantum Overview Quantum Intelligent/Special Purpose I/O Modules Overview Quantum Intelligent/Special Purpose I/O modules operate with minimum intervention from the Quantum controller after initially downloading module parameters or programs. The Quantum intelligent/special purpose I/O modules include the following.
PAGE 26
Modicon Quantum Overview Quantum Simulator Modules (XSM) Overview There are two types of simulator modules, as described below. Discrete and Analog Simulators The following table shows discrete and analog simulators. Type Description Discrete 16 Point Simulator (140XSM00200) The Discrete Simulator (16 points) is used to generate up to 16 binary input signals to the 140DAI54000 and the 140DAI74000 AC input modules.
PAGE 27
Modicon Quantum Overview Quantum Battery, Backplanes, and CableFast Cabling Battery Module (XCP) The Quantum battery module provides RAM backup power for the Quantum expert module. Backplanes (XBP) Quantum backplanes may be used in all locations of local, remote, or distributed I/ O. There are six backplanes available in 2, 3, 4, 6, 10, and 16 slot versions. All I/O slots are usable with any module able to be used in any slot.
PAGE 28
Modicon Quantum Overview Quantum Programming Packages Overview Quantum controllers support several editors. Quantum Editors The following table shows the editors for the Quantum controllers. Editor Modsoft V2.6 Where Discussed For more information on Modsoft, refer to the Modicon Modsoft Programmer User Manual (890USE11500). Concept V2.5 (or later versions) For more information on Concept, refer to the Concept User Manual (840USE49300). ProWORX NXT V2.
PAGE 29
Quantum System Configurations II At a Glance Overview This part provides information on Quantum system configurations. What's in this Part? This part contains the following chapters: Chapter Chapter Name Page 2 Quantum Configurations 31 3 Network Configurations 43 29 35013379 02 October 2007 This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., Inc. 800-473-9123 www.barr-thorp.
PAGE 30
Quantum Configurations 30 35013379 02 October 2007 This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., Inc. 800-473-9123 www.barr-thorp.
PAGE 31
Quantum Configurations 2 At a Glance Introduction The following chapter provides information on the Quantum configurations, including Local I/O, Remote I/O (RIO), and Distributed I/O (DIO). What's in this Chapter? This chapter contains the following topics: Topic Page Quantum Local I/O, Remote I/O and Distributed I/O Configurations 32 Quantum Local I/O 34 Quantum Remote I/O (RIO) 35 Quantum Distributed I/O (DIO) 39 31 35013379 02 October 2007 This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co.
PAGE 32
Quantum Configurations Quantum Local I/O, Remote I/O and Distributed I/O Configurations Overview The following information contains a description of the Local I/O, Remote I/O and Distributed I/O and their configurations. These configurations (see the configuration table below for valid Quantum configurations) can be equipped with a combination of: z z z z z Quantum CPUs Power supplies I/O interfaces Expert modules I/O modules Note: Refer to System Specifications for the Quantum Module , p.
PAGE 33
Quantum Configurations Local, Remote and Distributed I/O Configuration Depending on the type of configuration—Local, Remote, or Distributed I/O, a variety of features will apply, as shown in the following table. Feature Configuration Local I/O Remote I/O Distributed I/O Maximum I/O Words Per drop 64 in / 64 out 64 in / 64 out 30 in / 32 out 1,984 in / 1,984 out 500 in / 500 out *864 any mix 448 any mix 31 63 Media Coax Twisted Pair Speed 1.5 Mhz 1 MHz 15,000 ft. (4,573 m) 1,500 ft.
PAGE 34
Quantum Configurations Quantum Local I/O Overview A local I/O configuration is contained in one rack and includes all Quantum modules mounted in a standard Quantum backplane. Quantum Local I/O can be as few as one I/O module (in a three slot backplane), or as many as 14, along with a CPU and power supply in a single 16 slot backplane. If required for the application, system interface modules are also included in the Local I/O backplane.
PAGE 35
Quantum Configurations Quantum Remote I/O (RIO) Overview Quantum RIO can be set up in single or dual cable configurations (refer to the following two figures) and is contained in one rack at each RIO drop. When RIO is used, the Quantum CPU may support several drops (a drop can be either Quantum, SY/MAX, 200, 500, or 800 Series I/O systems). Note: As stated above, the Quantum provides connectivity to other Modicon I/O products via the same system.
PAGE 36
Quantum Configurations Dual Cable RIO Configuration The following figure is an example of a dual cable Quantum RIO configuration. RIO PS CPUHead I/O I/O I/O Local I/O Drop Up to 31 Drops *RIO Tap *RIO Tap *RIO Tap and Terminator (#52-0422-000) *RIO Tap *RIO RIO PSDrop I/O I/O I/O I/O RIO Drop # m *RIO Tap and Terminator RIO PS Drop I/O I/O I/O P81 RIO Drop # n J890 B800 Series *An RIO tap (# MA-0185-100) is required for every RIO drop in the system.
PAGE 37
Quantum Configurations Single Cable Hot Standby Configuration The following figure is an example of a single cable Quantum Hot Standby configuration.
PAGE 38
Quantum Configurations Dual Cable Hot Standby Configuration The following figure is an example of a dual cable Quantum Hot Standby configuration.
PAGE 39
Quantum Configurations Quantum Distributed I/O (DIO) Overview Quantum DIO can be set up in standard single or dual cable configurations (refer to the following two figures). The Quantum DIO architecture is based on Modicon's Modbus Plus technology. When DIO is utilized, the Quantum system may support up to three distributed networks of up to 64 drops (using a repeater) each.
PAGE 40
Quantum Configurations Dual Cable DIO Configuration The following figure is an example of a dual cable Quantum DIO configuration.
PAGE 41
Quantum Configurations Part Numbers MODBUS Plus taps that can be used for single and dual cable DIO configurations include: z z Part Number 990NAD23000, plastic; and Part Number 990NAD23010, ruggedized.
PAGE 42
Quantum Configurations 42 35013379 02 October 2007 This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., Inc. 800-473-9123 www.barr-thorp.
PAGE 43
Network Configurations 3 At a Glance Introduction The following chapter provides information on the Quantum network support, network interface techniques, and Modbus and Modbus Plus communications. What's in this Chapter? This chapter contains the following topics: Topic Page Quantum Network Support 44 Quantum Network Interface Techniques 47 Quantum Modbus and Modbus Plus Communications 50 43 35013379 02 October 2007 This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., Inc. 800-473-9123 www.
PAGE 44
Network Configurations Quantum Network Support Overview Quantum systems provide multiple choices for open, standards-based networking and fieldbus connectivity requirements.
PAGE 45
Network Configurations Quantum Supported Networks The following table shows the Quantum supported networks.
PAGE 46
Network Configurations Service Description Modbus Modbus Remote Ethernet Plus I/O TCP/ SY/ MMS IP MAX Interbus LonWorks SERCOS Profibus Hot Standby Data Communications Support Y Y Optional Dual N Cabling Y Optional Fiber Optics Momentum I/O Drops Variable Speed Drives Servo Motion Control Y 3 N Y N Y Y 3 Y Y HMI: Displays Y & Panels Y HMI: Workstations Y Y N Y N N N N N N 1 Y N N N N N N N 1 Y Y Y 1 N N N N 1 N N N N 1 N N N N 1 Y N N N 1 N Y
PAGE 47
Network Configurations Quantum Network Interface Techniques Overview Quantum communication and networking modules use a variety of different techniques to interface to the Quantum controller over the local backplane. Direct CPU Driver This technique allows the CPU to control high speed data transfers to and from the communication and networking modules, maximizing throughput and performance.
PAGE 48
Network Configurations I/O Map Interface Some network and communication modules are interfaced to the controller through the standard I/O map configuration tables. In the following table, note that some network and communication modules require a Loadable instruction which enhances the standard controller Executive to support certain unique features of individual modules. In addition, some loadables allow the communication and networking modules to be controlled by means of user-application code.
PAGE 49
Network Configurations Model Number Description Module Interface Technique Loadable Required Backplane Support Local RIO DIO Bus Power mA 140NOE77110/1 Ethernet TCP/IP 10/100 TX/FX Factory Cast N N Y N N 750 140MMS42500 Multi-Axis Motion Controller w/ SERCOS Option Module N Y N N 2500 140NOL91100 LonWorks Interface, twisted pair FTT10 I/O Map (16/16) Y Y Y N 950 140NOL91110 LonWorks Interface, twisted pair TPT/XF-78 I/O Map (16/16) Y Y Y N 950 140NOL91120 LonWorks I
PAGE 50
Network Configurations Quantum Modbus and Modbus Plus Communications Overview Each Quantum CPU includes both a Modbus and Modbus Plus communications port. The features offered by both these communication protocols are listed in the following table. Modbus and Modbus Plus Features The following table shows the Modbus and Modbus Plus features. Modbus Features Modbus Modbus Plus Technique Slaves polled by a master Peer-to-peer, token rotation Speed 19.
PAGE 51
Network Configurations Bridging between Modbus and Modbus Plus is done automatically on CPUs and Modbus Plus network modules. The bridge mode redirects Modbus messages onto the Modbus Plus network for easy connectivity between Modbus and Modbus Plus devices. A summary of the available services on Quantum Modbus and Modbus Plus ports is given in the following table. Modbus and Modbus Plus Services Type Modbus Services The following table shows the Quantum Modbus and Modbus Plus services.
PAGE 52
Network Configurations Type Service Description Modbus Plus Services Native CPU Ports NOM 1-2 Ports Modbus Modbus Plus Modbus Modbus Modbus Modbu Plus s Plus - Y - Y - Y - Y - Y - Y MSTR get/clear local/remote statistics - Y - Y - Y MSTR read/write register messagin g 6 MSTR read/write Global Data messaging NOM 3-6 Ports Config Extension Global Data Support - Y - Y - N Config Extension Peer Cop Support - Y - Y - N Distributed I/O Support - Y - Y - N CPU Pr
PAGE 53
Quantum System Specifications III At a Glance Overview This part provides system specifications for the Quantum automation system. What's in this Part? This part contains the following chapters: Chapter 4 Chapter Name Page System Specifications for the Quantum Module 53 35013379 02 October 2007 This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., Inc. 800-473-9123 55 www.barr-thorp.
PAGE 54
System Specifications 54 35013379 02 October 2007 This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., Inc. 800-473-9123 www.barr-thorp.
PAGE 55
System Specifications for the Quantum Module 4 Quantum System Specifications Overview All modules are designed to the following system specifications, which include: z z z mechanical, electrical, AC/DC power supplies. It shows the I/O modules operating voltages for: z z z less than 24 Vac or Vdc, between 24 and 48 Vac or Vdc, greater than 48 Vac or Vdc. Also given are the operating and storage conditions as well as agency approvals.
PAGE 56
System Specifications AC/DC Power Supplies I/O Modules Table 1 I/O Modules Table 2 The following table shows the Quantum AC/DC power supplies. Fast Transients (IEC 1000-4-4) 2 kV common mode Damped Oscillatory Transients 2 kV common mode 1 kV differential mode Surge Withstand Capability (Transients) (IEC 1000-4-5) 2 kV common mode 1 kV differential mode Non Periodic Peak Input Voltage 2.3 times nominal for 1.
PAGE 57
System Specifications Operating Conditions Gas Resistance in Conformally Coated Modules The following table shows the Quantum operating conditions. Temperature 0 ... 60° C (32 ... 140° F), unless specified otherwise Humidity 0 ... 95 percent RH non-condensing at 60° C Chemical Interactions Enclosures and terminal strips are made of polycarbonates. This material can be damaged by strong alkalis and various hydrocarbons, esters, halogens and ketones in combination with heat.
PAGE 58
System Specifications Agency Approvals The following table shows the agency approvals. UL 508 CSA 22.2-142 Factory Mutual Class 1, Div 2 European Directives (CE) 89/336/EEC, 73/23/EEC and amendments Note: All Quantum system modules contain static-sensitive components. Each module is labeled with the following static-sensitive symbol. The following figure shows the static sensitive symbol. 58 35013379 02 October 2007 This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., Inc. 800-473-9123 www.barr-thorp.
PAGE 59
Quantum Module Specifications and Configuration IV At a Glance Overview This part provides information on Quantum module specifications as well as configuration of the modules.
PAGE 60
Specifications and Configuration 60 35013379 02 October 2007 This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., Inc. 800-473-9123 www.barr-thorp.
PAGE 61
Hardware Specifications for the Quantum Modules 5 Quantum Hardware Specifications Overview This section shows the specifications for Quantum hardware modules including: z z z z z Power Supply Specifications Power Supplies CPUs Networking Intelligent/Special Purpose I/O The following table shows the power supplies for local and RIO Drops. Part Number Source Voltage Type Bus Current Provided 140CPS11100 115 ... 230 Vac Standalone 3A 140CPS11400 115 ...
PAGE 62
Hardware Specifications CPU Specifications Networking Modules – RIO Field Bus Modules The following table shows specifications for the CPUs. Part Numbers Max IEC Program SRAM Size Ladder Logic Available Registers Bus Current Required 140CPU11302 109 k 256 k 8k 10 k 780 mA 140CPU11303 368 k 512 k 16 k 10 k 790 mA 140CPU21304 606 k 768 k 32 k or 48 k 64 k or 32 k 900 mA 140CPU42402 570 k 2M 64 k 64 k 1.8 A 140CPU43412 896 k 2M 64 k 57 k 1.
PAGE 63
Hardware Specifications Networking Modules – DIO (Modbus Plus) Networking Modules – Ethernet Networking Modules – NOM Intelligent/ Special Purpose – Hot Standby Module The following table shows specifications for DIO Networking modules. Part Numbers (DIO) Source Voltage Communication Channel(s) Bus Current Provided 140CRA21110 115 Vac 1 3A 140CRA21210 115 Vac 2 3A 140CRA21120 24 Vdc 1 3A 140CRA21220 24 Vdc 2 3A The following table shows specifications for ethernet modules.
PAGE 64
Hardware Specifications Counter Modules The following table shows specifications for the high speed Counter modules.
PAGE 65
Hardware Specifications I/O Modules – Discrete In The following table shows specifications for the Discrete In modules.
PAGE 66
Hardware Specifications I/O Modules – Discrete Out The following table shows specifications for the Discrete Out modules. Type/Part Number Function Points/ Points Channels per Group Bus Current Required Special Features 140DAO84000 24 ... 230 Vac 16 N/A 350 mA 4 A per point, isolated 140DAO84010 24 ... 115 Vac 16 N/A 350 mA 4 A per point, isolated 140DAO84210 115 ... 230 Vac 16 4 350 mA 4 A per point, group fused 140DAO84220 24 ...
PAGE 67
Hardware Specifications I/O Modules – Discrete In/Out I/O Modules – Analog In/Out The following table shows specifications for the Discrete In/Out modules. Type/Part Number Type/Part Points/ Number channels Points Bus current per group required Special features 140DAM59000 115 Vac 16 In 8 Out 8 4 250 mA 0.5 A per point on outputs, grouped fused 140DDM39000 24 Vdc 16 In 8 Out 8 4 330 mA 0.
PAGE 68
Hardware Specifications I/O Modules – Analog In I/O Modules – Analog Out The following table shows specifications for the Analog In modules. Type/Part Number Function Points/ Channels Points per Group Bus Current Required Special Features 140ACI03000 4 ... 20 mA 1 ... 5 Vdc 8 1 240 mA Mixed inputs, current or voltage 140ACI04000 0 ...25 mA 0 ... 20 mA 4 ... 20 mA 16 16 360 mA High density 140ARI03010 RTD: Pt, Ni, Ohms 8 1 200 mA IEC/American 140AVI03000 0 ...
PAGE 69
Hardware Specifications Intrinsic Safe Analog Modules Intrinsic Safe Discrete Modules Miscellaneous Modules The following table shows specifications for the Intrinsic Safe analog modules. Type/Part Number Function Points/ Points Bus Channels per Current Group Required Special Features 140AII33000 TC: B, E, J, K, R, S, T RTD: Pt, Ni Ohms 8 1 400 mA CJC INT/EXT IEC/American 140AII33010 0 ... 25 mA 0 ... 20 mA 4 ... 20 mA 8 8 1.5 A Mixed inputs, current. Internal power supply.
PAGE 70
Hardware Specifications 70 35013379 02 October 2007 This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., Inc. 800-473-9123 www.barr-thorp.
PAGE 71
Power Supply Modules 6 At a Glance Overview The following chapter describes the Quantum power supplies, including: specifications, LED indicators and descriptions, and wiring diagrams. Where applicable, it includes operating curves and hold-up capacitor timing charts.
PAGE 72
Power Supplies 140CPS11100 AC Power Supply 115/230 Vac 3 A Module Overview The following provides information on the AC Power Supply, 115/230 Vac, 3 A module (Product Version 01 or greater). Power Supply Module The following figure shows the power supply module components.
PAGE 73
Power Supplies Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the CPS11100 115/230 VAC power supply module. Specifications Input Requirements Input Voltage Input Frequency Input Voltage Total Harmonic Distortion 93 ... 132 Vac (jumper installed) 170 ... 264 Vac (no jumper) 47 ... 63 Hz Less than 10% of the fundamental ms value Input Current 0.4 A @ 115 Vac. 0.2 A @ 230 Vac Inrush Current 13 A @ 115 Vac. @ 25°C first power up 23 A @ 230 Vac.
PAGE 74
Power Supplies LED Indicator and Description The following figure shows the CPS11100 LED indicator. Pwr ok Note: For "Closed System" installations, connector 140XTS00 500 must be used (refer to Closed System Installation, p. 795 ). The following table shows the CPS11100 LED description. LED Description Wiring Diagram LEDs Color Indication when On Pwr ok Green Power is supplied to the bus. The following figure shows the CPS11100 wiring diagram.
PAGE 75
Power Supplies 140CPS11100 AC Power Supply 115/230 Vac 3 A Module (PV01 or Greater) Overview The following provides information on the AC Power Supply, 115/230 Vac, 3 A module (PV01 or greater). Power Supply Module The following figure shows the power supply module (PV01 or greater) components.
PAGE 76
Power Supplies Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the CPS11100 115/230 VAC power supply module (PV01 or greater). Specifications Input Requirements Input Voltage 100 ... 276 Vac Input Frequency Input Voltage Total Harmonic Distortion 47 ... 63 Hz Less than 10% of the fundamental ms value Input Current 0.4 A @ 115 Vac. 0.2 A @ 230 Vac Inrush Current 10 A @ 115 Vac.
PAGE 77
Power Supplies LED Indicator and Description The following figure shows the CPS11100 (PV01 or greater) LED indicator. Pwr ok Note: For "closed system" installations, connector 140XTS00 500 must be used (refer to Closed System Installation, p. 795 ). The following table shows the CPS11100 (PV01 or greater) LED description. LED Description Wiring Diagram LEDs Color Indication when On Pwr ok Green Power is supplied to the bus.
PAGE 78
Power Supplies 140CPS11400 AC Power Supply, 115/230 Vac, 8 A Module Overview The following provides information on the AC Power Supply, 115/230 Vac, 8 A module. Power Supply Module The following figure shows the power supply module components.
PAGE 79
Power Supplies Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the CPS11400 115/230 VAC power supply module. Specifications Input Requirements Input Voltage Input Frequency Input Voltage Total Harmonic Distortion 93 ... 138 Vac. 170 ... 276 Vac 47 ... 63 Hz Less than 10% of the fundamental ms value Input Current 1.1 A @ 115 Vac. 0.6 A @ 230 Vac Inrush Current 38 A @ 115 Vac.
PAGE 80
Power Supplies LED Indicator and Description The following figure shows the CPS11400 LED indicator. Pwr ok The following table shows the CPS11400 LED description. LED Description Color Indication when On Green Power is supplied to the bus. The following figures show the CPS11400 Wiring Diagram (left) and operating curve (right). 1 2 } Internally connected. Do not connect any external wiring to these points.
PAGE 81
Power Supplies 140CPS11410 AC Summable Power Supply 115/230 Vac, 8 A Overview The following provides information on the AC power supply, 115/230 Vac, 8 A module. Power Supply Module The following figure shows the power supply module and its components.
PAGE 82
Power Supplies Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the CPS11410 115/230 VAC power supply module. Specifications Input Requirements Input Voltage Input Frequency Input Voltage Total Harmonic Distortion 93 ... 138 Vac. 170 ... 276 Vac 47 ... 63 Hz Less than 10% of the fundamental rms value Input Current 1.1 A @ 115 Vac. 0.6 A @ 230 Vac Inrush Current 38 A @ 115 Vac.
PAGE 83
Power Supplies LED Indicator and Description The following figure shows the CPS11410 LED indicator. Pwr ok The following table shows the CPS11410 LED description. LED Descripton Wiring Diagram LEDs Color Indication when On Pwr ok Green Power is supplied to the bus. The following figures shows the 140CPS11410. 1 2 } Internally connected. Do not connect any external wiring to these points.
PAGE 84
Power Supplies 140CPS11420 AC Summable Power Supply 115/230 Vac, 11 A Overview The following provides information on the AC power supply, 115/230 Vac, 11 A module. Power Supply Module The following figure shows the power supply module and its components.
PAGE 85
Power Supplies Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the CPS11420 115/230 VAC power supply module. Specifications Input Requirements Input Voltage Input Frequency Input Voltage Total Harmonic Distortion 93 ... 132 Vac. 170 ... 264 Vac 47 ... 63 Hz Less than 10% of the fundamental rms value Input Current 1.2 A @ 115 Vac. 0.7 A @ 230 Vac Inrush Current @ 25° C (first power up) ≤ 20 A @ 115 Vac.
PAGE 86
Power Supplies LED Indicator and Description The following figure shows the CPS11420 LED indicator. Pwr ok The following table shows the CPS11420 LED description. LED Description Wiring Diagram LEDs Color Indication when On Pwr ok Green Power is supplied to the bus. The following figures shows the CPS11420.
PAGE 87
Power Supplies 140CPS12400 AC Redundant Power Supply, 115/230 Vac 8 A Module Overview The following provides information on the AC redundant power supply, 115/230 Vac, 8 A module. Power Supply Module The following figure shows the power supply module components.
PAGE 88
Power Supplies Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the CPS12400 PS 115/230 VAC power supply module. Specifications Input Requirements Input Voltage Input Frequency Input Voltage Total Harmonic Distortion 93 ... 138 Vac. 170 ... 276 Vac 47 ... 63 Hz Less than 10% of the fundamental rms value Input Current 1.1 A @ 115 Vac. 0.6 A @ 230 Vac Inrush Current 38 A @ 115 Vac.
PAGE 89
Power Supplies LED Indicator and Description The following figure shows the CPS12400 LED indicator. Pwr ok The following table shows the CPS12400 LED description. LED Description Wiring Diagram LEDs Color Indication when On Pwr ok Green Power is supplied to the bus. The following figure shows the 140CPS12400 wiring diagram. 1 2 } Internally connected. Do not connect any external wiring to these points.
PAGE 90
Power Supplies 140CPS12420 AC Redundant Power Supply, 115/230 Vac 11 A Module Overview The following provides information on the AC redundant power supply, 115/230 Vac, 11 A module. Power Supply Module The following figure shows the power supply module components.
PAGE 91
Power Supplies Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the CPS12420 PS 115/230 VAC power supply module. Specifications Input Requirements Input Voltage Input Frequency Input Voltage Total Harmonic Distortion 93 ... 132 Vac. 170 ... 264 Vac 47 ... 63 Hz Less than 10% of the fundamental rms value Input Current 1.2 A @ 115 Vac 0.
PAGE 92
Power Supplies LED Indicator and Description The following figure shows the CPS12420 LED indicator. Pwr ok The following table shows the CPS12420 LED description. LED Description Wiring Diagram LEDs Color Indication when On Pwr ok Green Power is supplied to the bus. The following figure shows the CPS12420 wiring diagram.
PAGE 93
Power Supplies 140CPS21100 DC Power Supply, 24 Vdc, 3 A Module Overview The following provides information on the DC power supply, 24 Vdc, 3 A module. Power Supply Module The following figure shows the power supply module components.
PAGE 94
Power Supplies Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the CPS21100 PS 24 VDC power supply module. Specifications Input Requirements Input Voltage 20 ... 30 Vdc Input Current 1.6 A Inrush Current 30 A Input Power Interruption 1.0 ms max @ 20 V. 20.0 ms max @ 24 V Fusing (external) 2.5 A slo-blo recommended (Part # 043502516 or equivalent) Output to Bus Voltage 5.1 Vdc Maximum Current 3A Minimum Current 0.
PAGE 95
Power Supplies Wiring Diagram The following figure shows the 140CPS21100 wiring diagram. 1 Not used 2 Not used 3 -24 Vdc (Common) +24 Vdc 4 5 6 Not used Not used 7 Note: See Power and Grounding Considerations for AC and DC Powered Systems, p. 776 for power and grounding wiring guidelines and operational information. 95 35013379 02 October 2007 This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., Inc. 800-473-9123 www.barr-thorp.
PAGE 96
Power Supplies 140CPS21400 DC Summable Power Supply, 24 Vdc, 8 A Module Overview The following provides information on the DC summable power supply, 24 Vdc, 8 A module. Power Supply Module The following figure shows the power supply module components.
PAGE 97
Power Supplies Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the 140CPS21400 PS 24 Vdc power supply module. Specifications Input Requirements Input Voltage 20 ... 30 Vdc Input Current 3.8 A max Inrush Current 25 A @ 24 Vdc. 14 A @ 20 Vdc Input Ripple 2.4 Vdc max, 94 ... 189 Hz Input Power Interruption 1 ms max @ 24 Vdc (see the hold-up capacitor timing chart) Fusing (external) 5.0 A slo-blo recommended (Part # 043502405 or equivalent) Output to Bus Voltage 5.
PAGE 98
Power Supplies Wiring Diagram and Timing Chart The following figures show the CPS214 wiring diagram (left) and the hold-up capacitor timing chart (right). Capacitor Size (millifarads) 1 2 3 4 } 100 100 Power Loss Alarm 68 47 90 22 80 -24 Vdc (Common) +24 Vdc 70 Times/ms 60 10 5.8 4.7 2.2 1 0 50 5 + 6 - 40 Capacitor (Optional) 30 Capacitor Size (millifarads) 20 10 7 0 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 Input Voltage Note: 1.
PAGE 99
Power Supplies 140CPS22400 DC Redundant Power Supply, 24 Vdc, 8 A Module Overview The following provides information on the DC Redundant Power Supply, 24 Vdc, 8 A module. Power Supply Module The following figure shows the power supply module components.
PAGE 100
Power Supplies Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the 24 Vdc, 8 A DC redundant power supply. Specifications Input Requirements Input Voltage 20 ... 30 Vdc Input Current 3.8 A max Inrush Current 25 A @ 24 Vdc. 14 A @ 20 Vdc Input Ripple 2.4 Vdc max, 94 ... 189 Hz Input Power Interruption 1 ms max @ 24 Vdc Fusing (external) 5.0 A slo-blo recommended (Part # 043502405 or equivalent) Output to Bus Voltage 5.
PAGE 101
Power Supplies Wiring Diagram and Timing Chart The following figures show the 140CPS22400 wiring diagram (left) and the 140CPS22400 hold-up capacitor timing chart (right). Capacitor Size (millifarads) 1 2 3 4 } Power Loss Alarm 100 100 68 47 90 22 80 -24 Vdc (Common) +24 Vdc 70 Times/ms 60 10 5.8 4.7 2.2 1 0 50 5 + 6 - 40 Capacitor (Optional) 30 Capacitor Size (millifarads) 20 10 7 0 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 Input Voltage Note: 1.
PAGE 102
Power Supplies 140CPS41400 DC Summable Power Supply, 48 Vdc, 8 A Module Overview The following provides information on the DC summable power supply, 48 Vdc, 8 A module. Power Supply Module The following figure shows the power supply module components.
PAGE 103
Power Supplies Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the CPS41400, 48 VDC power supply module. Specifications Input Requirements Input Voltage 40 ... 72 Vdc Input Current 1.2 A @ 48 Vdc Inrush Current 25 A @ 40 Vdc Input Power Interruption 13 ms @ 48 Vdc Fusing (external) 2.0 A medium time-lag recommended 000 or equivalent) (Part # 57-0089- Output to Bus Voltage 5.
PAGE 104
Power Supplies Wiring Diagram The following figure shows the CPS41400 wiring diagram. } 1 2 Power Loss Alarm -48 ... -60 Vdc (Common) 3 +48 ... +60 Vdc 4 + 5 Capacitor - (Optional) 6 7 Note: A normally closed relay contact rated at 220 Vac, 6A / 30 Vdc, 5A is available on terminals 1 and 2 of the power terminal strip. This contact set may be used to signal input power OFF, or a power supply failure. Note: See Power and Grounding Considerations for AC and DC Powered Systems, p.
PAGE 105
Power Supplies 140CPS42400 DC Redundant Power Supply, 48 Vdc, 8 A Module Overview The following provides information on the DC redundant power supply, 48 Vdc, 8 A module. Power Supply Module The following figure shows the power supply module components.
PAGE 106
Power Supplies Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the 140CPS42400 PS 48 VDC RED power supply module. Specifications Input Requirements Input Voltage 40 ... 72 Vdc Input Current 1.3 A @ 48 Vdc Inrush Current 25 A @ 48 Vdc Input Power Interruption Fusing (external) 13 ms @ 48 Vdc 2.0 A medium time-lag recommended (Part # 57-0089-000 or equivalent) Output to Bus Voltage 5.
PAGE 107
Power Supplies Wiring Diagram The following figure shows the CPS42400 wiring diagram. } 1 2 Power Loss Alarm -48 ... -60 Vdc (Common) 3 +48 ... +60 Vdc 4 + 5 Capacitor - (Optional) 6 7 Note: See Power and Grounding Considerations for AC and DC Powered Systems, p. 776 for power and grounding wiring guidelines and operational information. Note: A normally closed relay contact rated at 220 Vac, 6A / 30 Vdc, 5A is available on terminals 1 and 2 of the power terminal strip.
PAGE 108
Power Supplies 140CPS51100 DC Power Supply, 125 Vdc, 3 A Module Overview The following provides information on the DC power supply, 125 Vdc, 3 A module. Power Supply Module The following figure shows the power supply module components.
PAGE 109
Power Supplies Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the CPS51100 125 Vdc power supply module. Specifications Input Requirements Input Voltage 100 ... 150 Vdc including ripple Input Current 0.4 A Inrush Current 10 A Input Power Interruption 1.0 ms max Fusing (external) 1.5 A slo-blo recommended (Part # 043502515 or equivalent) Output to Bus Voltage 5.1 Vdc Maximum Current 3A Minimum Current 0.
PAGE 110
Power Supplies Wiring Diagram The following figure shows the CPS51100 wiring diagram. 1 Not used 2 Not used 3 Not used 4 Not used 5 6 125 VDC + 125 VDC - (Common) 7 Note: See Power and Grounding Considerations for AC and DC Powered Systems, p. 776 for power and grounding wiring guidelines and operational information. 110 35013379 02 October 2007 This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., Inc. 800-473-9123 www.barr-thorp.
PAGE 111
Power Supplies 140CPS52400 DC Standalone/Redundant Power Supply, 125 Vdc, 8 A Overview The following provides information on the DC Standalone/Redundant power supply, 125 Vdc, 8 A module. Power Supply Module The following figure shows the power supply module components.
PAGE 112
Power Supplies Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the CPS52400 125 VDC power supply module. Specifications Input Requirements Input Voltage 100 ... 150 Vdc including ripple Input Current 0.5 A @ 125 Vdc Inrush Current 28 A @ 125 Vdc Input Power Interruption Fusing (external) 1.0 ms max 2 A slo-blo recommended (Part # 57-0089-000 or equivalent) Output to Bus Voltage Maximum Current Minimum Current Protection 5.
PAGE 113
Power Supplies LED Indicator and Description The following figure shows the CPS52400 LED indicator. Pwr ok The following table shows the CPS52400 LED description. LED Description Wiring Diagram LEDs Color Indication when On Pwr ok Green Power is supplied to the bus. The following figure shows the CPS52400 wiring diagram. Internally connected. Do not connect any external wiring to these points.
PAGE 114
Power Supplies 114 35013379 02 October 2007 This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., Inc. 800-473-9123 www.barr-thorp.
PAGE 115
CPU Modules 7 At a Glance Introduction This chapter provides information on the specifications, LED indicators and description and error codes for the Quantum CPU modules. The following table shows an overview of the Quantum CPU modules. CPU SRAM (bytes) Ladder Registers Extended 984 Ladder Performance Max IEC Program 140CPU11302 256 k 8k 10 k none 0.3 - 1.4 ms/k 109 k 140CPU11303 512 k 16 k 10 k none 0.3 - 1.
PAGE 116
CPU Modules What's in this Chapter? This chapter contains the following topics: Topic Page 140CPU11302 CPU Module 117 140CPU11303 CPU Module 128 140CPU21304 CPU Module 139 140CPU42402 CPU Module 150 140CPU43412 CPU Module 161 140CPU43412A CPU Module 174 140CPU53414 CPU Module 188 140CPU53414A CPU Module 200 140CPU53414B CPU Module 214 116 35013379 02 October 2007 This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., Inc. 800-473-9123 www.barr-thorp.
PAGE 117
CPU Modules 140CPU11302 CPU Module Overview The following provides information on the 140CPU11302 Controller module – CPU 256 K, 1xModbus Plus, Max IEC Program 109 K (requires IEC-only Exec.) CPU Module The following figure shows the CPU Module and its components. 140 CPU 113 02 LED Area CONTROLLER Model Number Module Description Color Code Removable door Part #043513804 Customer Identification Label (Fold label and place it inside door) Part #043502480 Date Installed Batt. Battery Batt.
PAGE 118
CPU Modules Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the 140CPU11302 CONTROLLER module.
PAGE 119
CPU Modules Specifications Diagnostics Power Up Runtime RAM RAM RAM Address RAM Address Executive Checksum Executive Checksum User Logic Check User Logic Check Processor Bus Current Required 780 mA Power Dissipation TOD Clock 3.9 W +/- 8.0 seconds/day 0 ... 60° C Maximum Number of NOM, NOE, and MMS modules (any combination) 2 * This information can be a mix of Discrete or Register I/O.
PAGE 120
CPU Modules LED Indicators and Descriptions The following figure shows the CPU LED indicators. Ready Run Bat Low Modbus Modbus + Error A Mem Prt The following table shows the LED descriptions. LED Descriptions LEDs Color Indication when On Ready Green The CPU has passed powerup diagnostics. Run Green The CPU has been started and is solving logic. (See the following table for Run LED error codes). Modbus Green Communications are active on the Modbus port.
PAGE 121
CPU Modules LED Error Codes The following table show the number of times the Run LED blinks for each type of error, and the crash codes possible for that group (all codes are in hex) for the 140CPU11302 module.
PAGE 122
CPU Modules LED Error Codes Number of Blinks 4 5 Code 604 Error UPI timeout error 605 bad UPI response opcode 606 UPI bus diagnostic error 607 modbus cmd-buffer overflow 608 modbus cmd-length is zero 609 modbus abort command error 614 mbp bus interface error 615 bad mbp response opcode 616 timeout waiting for mbp 617 mbp out of synchronization 618 mbp invalid path 619 page 0 not paragraph aligned 61E bad external uart hardware 61F bad external uart interrupt 620 bad receive c
PAGE 123
CPU Modules Front Panel Switches Two, three-position slide switches are located on the front of the CPU. The left switch is used for memory protection when in the top position and no memory protection in the middle and bottom positions. The three-position slide switch on the right is used to select the communication parameter settings for the Modbus (RS-232) ports. The following figure shows the three options that are available for the CPU11302.
PAGE 124
CPU Modules Setting the slide switch to the bottom position gives you the ability to assign communication parameters to the port in software; the following parameters are valid. Valid Communication Port Parameters Baud 19,200 1,200 9,600 600 7,200 300 4,800 150 3,600 134.5 2,400 110 2,000 75 1,800 Data Bits Stop Bits Parity 50 7/8 1/2 Enable/Disable Odd/Even Device Address 124 1 ... 247 35013379 02 October 2007 This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., Inc. 800-473-9123 www.
PAGE 125
CPU Modules Rear Panel Switches Two rotary switches are located on the rear panel of the CPU. They are used for setting the Modbus Plus node and Modbus port addresses. Note: The highest address that may be set with these switches is 64. SW1 (the top switch) sets the upper digit (tens) of the address; SW2 (the bottom switch) sets the lower digit (ones) of the address. The illustration below shows the correct setting for an example address of 11. The following figure shows SW1 and SW2.
PAGE 126
CPU Modules Modbus Connector Pinouts All Quantum CPUs are equipped with a nine-pin RS-232C connector that supports Modicon’s proprietary Modbus communication protocol. The following is the Modbus port pinout connections for nine-pin and 25-pin connections. Note: Although the Modbus ports electrically support existing Modbus cables, it is recommended that a Modbus programming cable (Part # 990NAA2620 or 990NAA26350) be used. This cable has been designed to fit under the door of a Quantum CPU or NOM module.
PAGE 127
CPU Modules Modbus Ports Pinout Connections for Portable Computers The following figure shows the Modbus port pinout connections for nine-pin portable (laptop) computers. IBM-AT 9-Pin Female Quantum 9-Pin Male CD SHIELD RX RX TX TX DTR DTR GRND GRND DSR DSR RTS RTS CTS CTS NC NC The following is the abbreviation key for the above figures.
PAGE 128
CPU Modules 140CPU11303 CPU Module Overview The following provides information on the 140CPU11303 Controller module – CPU 512 k, 1xModbus Plus, Max IEC Program 368 K (requires IEC Exec.) CPU Module The following figure shows the CPU Module and its components. 140 CPU 113 03 LED Area CONTROLLER Model Number Module Description Color Code Removable door Customer Identification Label (Fold label and place it inside door) Date Installed Batt. Battery Batt.
PAGE 129
CPU Modules Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the 140CPU11303 CONTROLLER module.
PAGE 130
CPU Modules Specifications Diagnostics Power Up Runtime RAM RAM RAM Address RAM Address Executive Checksum Executive Checksum User Logic Check User Logic Check Processor Bus Current Required 790 mA Power Dissipation 3.95 W TOD Clock +/- 8.0 seconds/day 0 ... 60° C Maximum Number of NOM, NOE, and MMS modules (any combination) 2 * This information can be a mix of Discrete or Register I/O.
PAGE 131
CPU Modules LED Indicators and Descriptions The following figure shows the CPU11303 LED indicators. Ready Run Bat Low Modbus Modbus + Error A Mem Prt The following table shows the CPU11303 LED descriptions. LED Descriptions LEDs Color Indication when On Ready Green The CPU has passed powerup diagnostics. Run Green The CPU has been started and is solving logic (see the following table for Run LED error codes). Modbus Green Communications are active on the Modbus port.
PAGE 132
CPU Modules LED Error Codes The LED Error Codes table shows the number of times the Run LED blinks for each type of error and the crash codes possible for that group (all codes are in hex). The following table shows the blinking run LED error codes.
PAGE 133
CPU Modules LED Error Codes Number of Blinks Code 4 604 5 Error UPI timeout error 605 bad UPI response opcode 606 UPI bus diagnostic error 607 modbus cmd-buffer overflow 608 modbus cmd-length is zero 609 modbus abort command error 614 mbp bus interface error 615 bad mbp response opcode 616 timeout waiting for mbp 617 mbp out of synchronization 618 mbp invalid path 619 page 0 not paragraph aligned 61E bad external uart hardware 61F bad external uart interrupt 620 bad receive
PAGE 134
CPU Modules Front Panel Switches Two, three-position slide switches are located on the front of the CPU. The left switch is used for memory protection when in the top position and no memory protection in the middle and bottom positions. The three-position slide switch on the right is used to select the communication parameter settings for the Modbus (RS-232) ports. The following figure shows the three options that are available.
PAGE 135
CPU Modules Setting the slide switch to the bottom position gives you the ability to assign communication parameters to the port in software; the following parameters are valid. Valid Communication Port Parameters Baud 19,200 1,200 9,600 600 7,200 300 4,800 150 3,600 134.5 2,400 110 2,000 75 1,800 50 Parity Enable/Disable Odd/Even Data Bits 7/8 Stop Bits 1/2 Device Address 1 ... 247 135 35013379 02 October 2007 This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., Inc.
PAGE 136
CPU Modules Rear Panel Switches Two rotary switches (refer to the illustration and table that follow) are located on the rear panel of the CPU. They are used for setting the Modbus Plus node and Modbus port addresses. Note: The highest address that may be set with these switches is 64. SW1 (the top switch) sets the upper digit (tens) of the address; SW2 (the bottom switch) sets the lower digit (ones) of the address. The illustration below shows the correct setting for an example address of 11.
PAGE 137
CPU Modules Modbus Connector Pinouts All Quantum CPUs are equipped with a nine-pin RS-232C connector that supports Modicon’s proprietary Modbus communication protocol. The following is the Modbus port pinout connections for nine-pin and 25-pin connections. Note: Although the Modbus ports electrically support existing Modbus cables, it is recommended that a Modbus programming cable (Part # 990NAA26320 or 990NAA26350) be used.
PAGE 138
CPU Modules Modbus Ports Pinout Connections for Portable Computers The following figure shows the Modbus port connections for nine-pin portable computer connections. IBM-AT 9-Pin Female Quantum 9-Pin Male CD SHIELD RX RX TX TX DTR DTR GRND GRND DSR DSR RTS RTS CTS CTS NC NC The following is the abbreviation key for the above figures.
PAGE 139
CPU Modules 140CPU21304 CPU Module Overview The following provides information on the 140CPU21304 Controller module – CPU 768 K, MATH, 1xModbus Plus, Max IEC Program 606 K. CPU Module The following figure shows the CPU Module and its parts. 140 CPU 213 04 LED Area CONTROLLER Model Number Module Description Color Code Removable door Part #043513804 Customer Identification Label (Fold label and place it inside door) Part #043502480 Date Installed Batt. Battery Batt.
PAGE 140
CPU Modules Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the CPU21304 controller module.
PAGE 141
CPU Modules Specifications Modbus Plus (RS-485) 1 network port (9-pin D-shell) General Diagnostics Power Up Runtime RAM RAM RAM Address RAM Address Executive Checksum Executive Checksum User Logic Check User Logic Check Processor Bus Current Required 900 mA Power Dissipation TOD Clock 4.5 W +/- 8.0 seconds/day 0 ... 60° C Maximum Number of NOM, NOE, and MMS modules (any combination) 2 *This information can be a mix of Discrete or Register I/Os.
PAGE 142
CPU Modules LED Indicators and Descriptions The following figure shows the CPU LED indicators. Ready Run Bat Low Modbus Modbus + Error A Mem Prt The following table shows the CPU LED descriptions. LED Descriptions LEDs Color Indication when On Ready Green The CPU has passed powerup diagnostics. Run Green The CPU has been started and is solving logic (see the following table for Run LED error codes). Modbus Green Communications are active on the Modbus port.
PAGE 143
CPU Modules LED Error Codes The Blinking Run LED Error Codes table shows the number of times the Run LED blinks for each type of error and the crash codes possible for that group (all codes are in hex). The following table shows the run LED error codes for the 140CPU21304.
PAGE 144
CPU Modules LED Error Codes Number of Blinks Code 4 604 5 Error UPI timeout error 605 bad UPI response opcode 606 UPI bus diagnostic error 607 modbus cmd-buffer overflow 608 modbus cmd-length is zero 609 modbus abort command error 614 mbp bus interface error 615 bad mbp response opcode 616 timeout waiting for mbp 617 mbp out of synchronization 618 mbp invalid path 619 page 0 not paragraph aligned 61E bad external uart hardware 61F bad external uart interrupt 620 bad receive
PAGE 145
CPU Modules Front Panel Switches Two, three-position slide switches are located on the front of the CPU. The left switch is used for memory protection when in the top position and no memory protection in the middle and bottom positions. The three-position slide switch on the right is used to select the communication parameter settings for the Modbus (RS-232) ports. The following figure shows the three options that are available.
PAGE 146
CPU Modules Valid Communication Port Parameters Baud 19,200 1,200 9,600 600 7,200 300 4,800 150 3,600 134.5 2,400 110 2,000 75 1,800 50 Parity Enable/Disable Odd/Even Data Bits 7/8 Stop Bits 1/2 Device Address 1 ... 247 146 35013379 02 October 2007 This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., Inc. 800-473-9123 www.barr-thorp.
PAGE 147
CPU Modules Rear Panel Switches Two rotary switches (refer to the illustration and table below) are located on the rear panel of the CPU. They are used for setting Modbus Plus node and Modbus port addresses. Note: The highest address that may be set with these switches is 64. SW1 (the top switch) sets the upper digit (tens) of the address; SW2 (the bottom switch) sets the lower digit (ones) of the address. The illustration below shows the correct setting for an example address of 11.
PAGE 148
CPU Modules Modbus Connector Pinouts All Quantum CPUs are equipped with a nine-pin RS-232C connector that supports Modicon’s proprietary Modbus communication protocol. The following is the Modbus port pinout connections for nine-pin and 25-pin connections. Note: Although the Modbus ports electrically support existing Modbus cables, it isrecommended that a Modbus programming cable (Part # 990NAA26320 or 990NAA26350) be used. This cable has been designed to fit under the door of a Quantum CPU or NOM module.
PAGE 149
CPU Modules Modbus Ports Pinout Connections for Portable Computers The follwing figure shows the Modbus port pinout connections for nine-pin portable computers. IBM-AT 9-Pin Female Quantum 9-Pin Male CD SHIELD RX RX TX TX DTR DTR GRND GRND DSR DSR RTS RTS CTS CTS NC NC The following is the abbreviation key for the above figures.
PAGE 150
CPU Modules 140CPU42402 CPU Module Overview The following provides information on the140CPU42402 Controller module – CPU 2 M, MATH, 2xModbus Plus, Max IEC Program 570 K. CPU Module The following figure shows the CPU module and its components. 140 CPU 424 02 LED Area 486 CONTROLLER Model Number Module Description Color Code Removable door Part #043513804 Customer Identification Label (Fold label and place it inside door) Part #043506673 Date Installed Batt. Battery Batt.
PAGE 151
CPU Modules Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the 140CPU42402 CONTROLLER module.
PAGE 152
CPU Modules Specifications Modbus (RS-232) Modbus Plus (RS-485) 1 serial port (9-pin D-shell) 2 (redundant) network ports (9-pin D-shell) General Diagnostics Power Up Runtime RAM RAM RAM Address RAM Address Executive Checksum Executive Checksum User Logic Check User Logic Check Processor Bus Current Required 1.8 A Power dissipation TOD Clock 9W +/- 8.0 seconds/day 0 ...
PAGE 153
CPU Modules LED Indicators and Descriptions The following figure shows the CPU LED indicators. Ready Run Bat Low Modbus Modbus + Error A Error B Mem Prt The following table shows the CPU LED descriptions. LED Descriptions LEDs Color Indication when On Ready Green The CPU has passed powerup diagnostics. Run Green The CPU has been started and is solving logic (see the following table for Run LED error codes). Modbus Green Communications are active on the Modbus port.
PAGE 154
CPU Modules LED Error Codes The following table shows the run LED error codes for the CPU42402.
PAGE 155
CPU Modules LED Error Codes Number of Blinks Code Error 4 604 UPI timeout error 605 bad UPI response opcode 606 UPI bus diagnostic error 607 modbus cmd-buffer overflow 608 modbus cmd-length is zero 609 modbus abort command error 614 mbp bus interface error 615 bad mbp response opcode 616 timeout waiting for mbp 617 mbp out of synchronization 618 mbp invalid path 5 619 page 0 not paragraph aligned 61E bad external uart hardware 61F bad external uart interrupt 620 bad receiv
PAGE 156
CPU Modules Front Panel Switches Two, three-position slide switches are located on the front of the CPU. The left switch is used for memory protection when in the top position and no memory protection in the middle and bottom positions. The three-position slide switch on the right is used to select the comm parameter settings for the Modbus (RS-232) ports. The following figure shows the three options that are available for the CPU42402 module.
PAGE 157
CPU Modules Setting the slide switch to the bottom position gives you the ability to assign comm parameters to the port in software; the following parameters are valid. Valid Comm Port Parameters Baud 19,200 1,200 9,600 600 7,200 300 4,800 150 3,600 134.5 2,400 110 2,000 75 1,800 50 Parity Enable/Disable Odd/Even Data Bits 7/8 Stop Bits 1/2 Device Address 1 ... 247 157 35013379 02 October 2007 This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., Inc. 800-473-9123 www.barr-thorp.
PAGE 158
CPU Modules Rear Panel Switches Two rotary switches (refer to the following illustration) are located on the rear panel of the CPU. They are used for setting Modbus Plus node and Modbus port addresses. Note: The highest address that may be set with these switches is 64. SW1 (the top switch) sets the upper digit (tens) of the address; SW2 (the bottom switch) sets the lower digit (ones) of the address. The illustration below shows the correct setting for an example address of 11.
PAGE 159
CPU Modules Modbus Connector Pinouts All Quantum CPUs are equipped with a nine-pin RS-232C connector that supports Modicon’s proprietary Modbus communication protocol. The following is the Modbus port pinout connections for nine-pin and 25-pin connections. Note: Although the Modbus ports electrically support existing Modbus cables, it is recommended that a Modbus programming cable (Part # 990NAA26320 or 990NAA26350) be used.
PAGE 160
CPU Modules Modbus Ports Pinout Connections for Portable Computers The following figure shows the Modbus port pinout connections for nine-pin portable computers IBM-AT 9-Pin Female Quantum 9-Pin Male CD SHIELD RX RX TX TX DTR DTR GRND GRND DSR DSR RTS RTS CTS CTS NC NC The following is the abbreviation key for the above figures.
PAGE 161
CPU Modules 140CPU43412 CPU Module Overview The following provides information on the 140CPU43412 Controller module – CPU 2M, 1xModbus Plus, Max IEC Program – 896 k. CPU Module The following figure shows the CPU Module and its components. 140 CPU 434 12 486 CONTROLLER LED Area Model Number Module Description Color Code Removable door Customer Identification Label Part #043513804 (Fold label and place it inside door) Part #31000226 Date Installed Batt.
PAGE 162
CPU Modules Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the CPU43412 CONTROLLER module.
PAGE 163
CPU Modules Specifications Battery Load Current at Power-off 7 μA Typical 210 μA Maximum Communication Modbus (RS-232) Modbus Plus (RS-485) 2 serial port (9-pin D-shell) 1 network port (9-pin D-shell) General Diagnostics Power Up Runtime RAM RAM RAM Address RAM Address Executive Checksum Executive Checksum User Logic Check User Logic Check Processor Bus Current Required 1.8 A Power Dissipation TOD Clock 9W +/- 8.0 seconds/day 0 ... 60° C Operating Temperature 0 ...
PAGE 164
CPU Modules LED Indicators and Descriptions The following figure shows the LED indicators. Ready Run Bat1 Low Modbus Modbus + Error A Mem Prt The following table shows the LED descriptions. LEDS Color Indication when On Ready Green The CPU has passed power-up diagnostics. Run Green The CPU has been started and is solving logic. Bat Low Red The battery needs replacing or is not present. Modbus Green Communications are active on the Modbus port 1 or 2.
PAGE 165
CPU Modules LED Error Codes The following table shows the run LED error codes for the 140CPU43412.
PAGE 166
CPU Modules LED Error Codes Number of Blinks Code 4 604 UPI timeout error 605 bad UPI response opcode 606 UPI bus diagnostic error 5 Error 607 modbus cmd-buffer overflow 608 modbus cmd-length is zero 609 modbus abort command error 614 mbp bus interface error 615 bad mbp response opcode 616 timeout waiting for mbp 617 mbp out of synchronization 618 mbp invalid path 619 page 0 not paragraph aligned 61E bad external uart hardware 61F bad external uart interrupt 620 bad receiv
PAGE 167
CPU Modules Front Panel Switches Two, three-position slide switches are located on the front of the CPU. The left switch is used for memory protection when in the top position and no memory protection in the middle and bottom positions. The three-position slide switch on the right is used to select the comm parameter settings for the Modbus (RS-232) ports. The following figure shows the three options that are available for the 140CPU43412 module.
PAGE 168
CPU Modules Setting the slide switch to the bottom position gives you the ability to assign comm parameters to the port in software; the following parameters are valid. Valid Comm Port Parameters Baud 19,200 1,200 9,600 600 7,200 300 4,800 150 3,600 134.5 2,400 110 2,000 75 1,800 50 Parity Enable/Disable Odd/Even Data Bits 7/8 Stop Bits 1/2 Device Address 1 ... 247 168 35013379 02 October 2007 This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., Inc. 800-473-9123 www.barr-thorp.
PAGE 169
CPU Modules Rear Panel Switches Two rotary switches (see the following illustration and table) are located on the rear panel of the CPU. They are used for setting Modbus Plus node and Modbus port addresses. Note: The highest address that may be set with these switches is 64. SW1 (the top switch) sets the upper digit (tens) of the address; SW2 (the bottom switch) sets the lower digit (ones) of the address. The illustration below shows the correct setting for an example address of 11.
PAGE 170
CPU Modules Key Switch The key switch is used to protect memory from programming changes while the controller is in operation. The following figure shows the key switch. Stop Stop Mem Prt Mem Prt Start Start Note: The key switch positions shown next to the switch (above) are for reference only and are marked on the module as indicated on the right. The following table shows the key switch information.
PAGE 171
CPU Modules Key Switch Description Key switch Position Start Modbus Connector Pinouts Controller Status Controller may be either stopped or running. Programmer may make changes and start/stop the controller Memory Protected From Programmer Changes Will Accept Programmer Stop or Start Key switch Transition N Y From Stop: Enables Programmer changes, starts controller. From Memory Protect: Enables programmer changes, starts controller if stopped.
PAGE 172
CPU Modules Modbus Ports Pinout Connections The following figure shows the Modbus port pinout connections for 9-pin and 25-pin connections.
PAGE 173
CPU Modules Modbus Ports Pinout Connections for Portable Computers The following figure shows the Modbus port pinout connections for 9-pin portable computers. IBM-AT 9-Pin Female Quantum 9-Pin Male CD SHIELD RX RX TX TX DTR DTR GRND GRND DSR DSR RTS RTS CTS CTS NC NC The following is the abbreviation key for the above figures.
PAGE 174
CPU Modules 140CPU43412A CPU Module Overview The following provides information on the specifications, LED indicators and description and error codes for the 140CPU43412A Controller Module. This module is functionally identical to the non-"A" version, however, the following should be considered: z If you are using the module in a Hot Standby topology, then you must use either two non-"A" models or two "A" models. z The "A" version requires a new flash executive.
PAGE 175
CPU Modules Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the CPU43412A Controller module.
PAGE 176
CPU Modules Specifications 7 μA Typical 210 μA Maximum Communication Modbus (RS-232) 2 serial port (9-pin D-shell) Modbus Plus (RS-485) Programming Software Capability 1 network port (9-pin D-shell) Modsoft, version 2.6 minimum Concept, version 2.1 with B2.1 patch Concept 2.2 with SR2 ProWORX NxT, version 2.0 minimum ProWORX Plus, version 1.05 minimum ProWORX 32, version 1.
PAGE 177
CPU Modules LED Indicators and Descriptions The following figure shows the LED indicators. Ready Run Bat low Modbus Modbus + Error A Mem Prt The following table provides a description of the LED indicators for the 140CPU43412A module. LEDS Color Indication when On Ready Green The CPU has passed power-up diagnostics. Run Green The CPU has been started and is solving logic. Bat Low Red Modbus Green The battery needs replacing or is not present.
PAGE 178
CPU Modules LED Error Codes The following table shows the run LED error codes for the 140CPU43412A.
PAGE 179
CPU Modules LED Error Codes Number of Blinks Code 4 604 UPI timeout error 605 bad UPI response opcode 606 UPI bus diagnostic error 5 Error 607 modbus cmd-buffer overflow 608 modbus cmd-length is zero 609 modbus abort command error 614 mbp bus interface error 615 bad mbp response opcode 616 timeout waiting for mbp 617 mbp out of synchronization 618 mbp invalid path 619 page 0 not paragraph aligned 61E bad external uart hardware 61F bad external uart interrupt 620 bad receiv
PAGE 180
CPU Modules Note: Information in the Code column is visible only with the Flash download utility. 180 35013379 02 October 2007 This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., Inc. 800-473-9123 www.barr-thorp.
PAGE 181
CPU Modules Front Panel Slide Switch The slide switch is used to select the comm parameter settings for the Modbus (RS232) ports. Three options are available: 1. Setting the switch to the top position assigns ASCII functionality to the port. 2. Setting the switch to the middle position assigns remote terminal unit (RTU) functionality to the port. 3. Setting the switch to the bottom position lets you assign comm parameters to the port in software.
PAGE 182
CPU Modules The following table shows the valid comm port parameters. Valid Comm Port Parameters Baud 19,200 1,200 9,600 600 7,200 300 4,800 150 3,600 134.5 2,400 110 2,000 75 1,800 50 Parity Enable/Disable Odd/Even Data Bits 7/8 Stop Bits 1/2 Device Address 1 ... 247 182 35013379 02 October 2007 This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., Inc. 800-473-9123 www.barr-thorp.
PAGE 183
CPU Modules Key Switch The key switch protects memory from programming changes while the controller is in operation. The following figure shows the key switch. Mem Prt Stop Mem Prt Start Stop Start Note: The key switch positions shown next to the switch (above) are for reference only and are marked on the module as indicated on the right. The CPU43412A has 1435KByte of Flash EPROM memory, which can be used to save the program and the initial values of variables.
PAGE 184
CPU Modules Rear Panel Address Switch The following figure shows the SW1 and SW2 settings for the Address Switch located on the rear panel. 9 0 1 8 2 SW1 (TENS) 7 3 4 5 6 9 0 1 8 2 SW2 (ONES) 7 3 4 5 6 SW1 sets the upper digit (tens) of the address. SW2 sets the lower digit (ones) of the address. The following table shows the SW1 and SW2 address settings. SW1 and SW2 Address Settings Node Address SW1 SW2 1 ... 9 0 1 ... 9 10 ... 19 1 0 ... 9 20 ... 29 2 0 ... 9 30 ...
PAGE 185
CPU Modules Key Switch Description The following table shows the key switch information. Key Switch Description Key switch Position Controller Status Memory Protected From Programmer Changes Will Accept Programmer Stop or Start Key switch Transition Stop Controller is stopped and disables Programmer changes. Y N From Start or Memory Protect: Stops controller, if running, and disables Programmer changes Mem Prt Controller may be either stopped or running and Programmer changes are disabled.
PAGE 186
CPU Modules Modbus Connector Pinouts All Quantum CPUs are equipped with a nine-pin RS-232 connector that support Modicon’s proprietary Modbus communication protocol. The following is the Modbus port pinout connections for nine-pin and 25-pin connections. Note: Although the Modbus ports electrically support existing Modbus cables, it is recommended that a Modbus programming cable (Part # 990NAA26320 or 990NAA26350) be used. This cable has been designed to fit under the door of a Quantum CPU or NOM module.
PAGE 187
CPU Modules Modbus Ports Pinout Connections for Portable Computers The following figure shows the Modbus port pinout connections for portable (laptop) computers. IBM-AT 9-Pin Female Quantum 9-Pin Male CD SHIELD RX RX TX TX DTR DTR GRND GRND DSR DSR RTS RTS CTS CTS NC NC The following is the abbreviation key for the above figures.
PAGE 188
CPU Modules 140CPU53414 CPU Module Overview The following provides information on the 140CPU53414 Controller module – CPU 4M, 1xModbus Plus, Max IEC Program – 2.5 M. CPU Module The following figure shows the CPU Module and its components. 140 CPU 534 14 LED Area 586 CONTROLLER Model Number Module Description Color Code Removable door Part #043513804 Battery Date Installed Batt. Batt.
PAGE 189
CPU Modules Specifications The following table shows the specification for the 140CPU53414 CONTROLLER module.
PAGE 190
CPU Modules Specifications 420 μA Maximum Communication Modbus (RS-232) Modbus Plus (RS-485) 2 serial port (9-pin D-shell) 1 network port (9-pin D-shell) General Diagnostics Power Up Runtime RAM RAM RAM Address RAM Address Executive Checksum Executive Checksum User Logic Check User Logic Check Processor Bus Current Required 1.8 A Power dissipation TOD Clock 9W +/- 8.0 seconds/day 0 ... 60° C Operating Temperature 0 ... 45° C *This information can be a mix of Discrete or Register I/Os.
PAGE 191
CPU Modules LED Indicators and Descriptions The following figure shows the LED indicators. Ready Run Bat Low Modbus Modbus + Error A Mem Prt The following table shows the LED descriptions. LED Descriptions LEDS Color Indication when On Ready Green The CPU has passed power-up diagnostics. The CPU has been started and is solving logic. Run Green Bat Low Red Modbus Green Communications are active on Modbus port 1 or 2. Modbus + Green Communications are active on the Modbus Plus port.
PAGE 192
CPU Modules LED Error Codes The following table shows the run LED error codes for the 140CPU53414 module.
PAGE 193
CPU Modules LED Error Codes Number of Blinks Code 4 604 UPI timeout error 605 bad UPI response opcode 606 UPI bus diagnostic error 5 Error 607 modbus cmd-buffer overflow 608 modbus cmd-length is zero 609 modbus abort command error 614 mbp bus interface error 615 bad mbp response opcode 616 timeout waiting for mbp 617 mbp out of synchronization 618 mbp invalid path 619 page 0 not paragraph aligned 61E bad external uart hardware 61F bad external uart interrupt 620 bad receiv
PAGE 194
CPU Modules Front Panel Slide Switch The slide switch, located on the front panel of the CPU, is used to select the communication parameter settings for the Modbus (RS-232) ports. Three positions are available: 1. Setting the switch to the top position assigns ASCII functionality to the port. 2. Setting the switch to the middle position assigns remote terminal unit (RTU) functionality to the port. 3. Setting the switch to the bottom position lets you assign comm parameters to the port in software.
PAGE 195
CPU Modules Setting the slide switch to the bottom position gives you the ability to assign communication parameters to the port in software; the following parameters are valid. Valid Communication Port Parameters Baud 19,200 1,200 9,600 600 7,200 300 4,800 150 3,600 134.5 2,400 110 2,000 75 1,800 Key Switch 50 Parity Enable/Disable Odd/Even Data Bits 7/8 Stop Bits 1/2 Device Address 1 ...
PAGE 196
CPU Modules Key Switch Description The following table provides descriptions of the key switch information. Key Switch Description Key Switch Position Controller Status Memory Will Accept Protected From Programmer Programmer Stop or Start Changes Stop Controller is stopped and disables Programmer changes. Y N From Start or Memory Protect: Stops controller, if running, and disables Programmer changes Mem Prt Controller may be either stopped or running and Programmer changes are disabled.
PAGE 197
CPU Modules Rear Panel Switches Two rotary switches (refer to the following illustration and table) are located on the rear panel of the CPU. They are used for setting Modbus Plus node and Modbus port addresses. Note: The highest address that may be set with these switches is 64. SW1 (the top switch) sets the upper digit (tens) of the address; SW2 (the bottom switch) sets the lower digit (ones) of the address. The illustration below shows the correct setting for an example address of 11.
PAGE 198
CPU Modules Modbus Connector Pinouts All Quantum CPUs are equipped with a 9-pin RS-232C connector that supports Modicon’s proprietary Modbus communication protocol. The following is the Modbus port pinout connections for 9-pin and 25-pin connections. Note: Although the Modbus ports electrically support existing Modbus cables, it is recommended that a Modbus programming cable (Part # 990NAA26320 or 990NAA26350) be used. This cable has been designed to fit under the door of a Quantum CPU or NOM module.
PAGE 199
CPU Modules Modbus Ports Pinout Connections for Portable Computers The following figure shows the Modbus port pinout connections for 9-pin portable (laptop) computers. IBM-AT 9-Pin Female Quantum 9-Pin Male CD SHIELD RX RX TX TX DTR DTR GRND GRND DSR DSR RTS RTS CTS CTS NC NC The following is the abbreviation key for the above figures.
PAGE 200
CPU Modules 140CPU53414A CPU Module Overview This unit provides information on the specifications, LED indicators and description and error codes for the 140CPU53414A Controller Module. This module is functionally identical to the non-"A" version, however, the following should be considered: z If you are using the module in a Hot Standby topology, then you must use either two non-"A" models or two "A" models. z The "A" version requires a new flash executive.
PAGE 201
CPU Modules Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the CPU53414A Controller module. Specifications User Logic/Reference Capacity 984 Ladder Logic Discrete Register Extended Register IEC Application Memory 64 k words 64 k 57 k 96 k 2.
PAGE 202
CPU Modules Specifications Service Life Shelf Life 1200 mAh 10 years with 0.5% loss of capacity per year Battery Load Current at Power-off Typical 14 μA Maximum 420 μA Communication Modbus (RS-232) 2 serial port (9-pin D-shell) Modbus Plus (RS-485) Programming Software Capability 1 network port (9-pin D-shell) Modsoft, version 2.6 Concept, version 2.1 with B2.1 patch exec Concept 2.2 with SR2 ProWorx NxT, version 2.0 ProWorx Plus, version 1.
PAGE 203
CPU Modules LED Indicators and Descriptions The following figure shows the LED indicators. Ready Run Bat Low Modbus Modbus + Error A Mem Prt The following table provides a description of the LED indicators for the 140CPU53414A module. LED Descriptions LEDS Color Indication when On Ready Green The CPU has passed power-up diagnostics. Run Green The CPU has been started and is solving logic. Bat Low Red Modbus Green The battery needs replacing or is not present.
PAGE 204
CPU Modules LED Error Codes The following table shows the run LED error codes for the 140CPU53414A.
PAGE 205
CPU Modules LED Error Codes Number of Blinks Code 4 604 5 Error UPI timeout error 605 bad UPI response opcode 606 UPI bus diagnostic error 607 modbus cmd-buffer overflow 608 modbus cmd-length is zero 609 modbus abort command error 614 mbp bus interface error 615 bad mbp response opcode 616 timeout waiting for mbp 617 mbp out of synchronization 618 mbp invalid path 619 page 0 not paragraph aligned 61E bad external uart hardware 61F bad external uart interrupt 620 bad receive
PAGE 206
CPU Modules Note: Information in the Code column is visible only with the Flash download utility. 206 35013379 02 October 2007 This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., Inc. 800-473-9123 www.barr-thorp.
PAGE 207
CPU Modules Front Panel Slide Switch The slide switch, located on the front of the CPU, is used to select the comm parameter settings for the Modbus (RS232) ports. Three options are available. 1. Setting the switch to the top position assigns ASCII functionality to the port. 2. Setting the switch to the middle position assigns remote terminal unit (RTU) functionality to the port. 3. Setting the switch to the bottom position lets you assign comm parameters to the port in software.
PAGE 208
CPU Modules The following table shows the valid comm port parameters. Valid Comm Port Parameters Baud 19,200 1,200 9,600 600 7,200 300 4,800 150 3,600 134.5 2,400 110 2,000 75 1,800 50 Parity Enable/Disable Odd/Even Data Bits 7/8 Stop Bits 1/2 Device Address 1 ... 247 208 35013379 02 October 2007 This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., Inc. 800-473-9123 www.barr-thorp.
PAGE 209
CPU Modules Key Switch The following figure shows the key switch. Mem Prt Stop Mem Prt Start Stop Start Note: The key switch positions shown next to the switch (above, left) are for reference only and are marked on the module as indicated on the right. The CPU53414A has 1435KByte of Flash EPROM memory, which can be used to save the program and the initial values of variables.
PAGE 210
CPU Modules Key Switch Description The following table provides a description of the key switch information. Key Switch Description Key Switch Position Controller Status Memory Protected From Programmer Changes Will Accept Programmer Stop or Start Stop Controller is stopped and disables Programmer changes. Y N From Start or Memory Protect: Stops controller, if running, and disables Programmer changes Mem Prt Controller may be either stopped or running and Programmer changes are disabled.
PAGE 211
CPU Modules Rear Panel Switches The following figure shows the SW1 and SW2 settings. 9 0 1 8 2 SW1 (TOP) 7 3 4 5 6 9 0 1 8 2 SW2 (BOTTOM) 7 3 4 5 6 SW1 sets the upper digit (tens) of the address. SW2 sets the lower digit (ones) of the address. The following table shows the SW1 and SW2 address settings. SW1 and SW2 Address Settings Node Address SW1 SW2 1 ... 9 0 1 ... 9 10 ... 19 1 0 ... 9 20 ... 29 2 0 ... 9 30 ... 39 3 0 ... 9 40 ... 49 4 0 ... 9 50 ... 59 5 0 ...
PAGE 212
CPU Modules Modbus Ports Pinout Connections The following figure shows the Modbus port pinout connections for 9-pin and 25-pin connections.
PAGE 213
CPU Modules Modbus Ports Pinout Connections for Portable Computers The following figure shows the Modbus port pinout connections for 9-pin portable computers. IBM-AT 9-Pin Female Quantum 9-Pin Male CD SHIELD RX RX TX TX DTR DTR GRND GRND DSR DSR RTS RTS CTS CTS NC NC The following is the abbreviation key for the above figures.
PAGE 214
CPU Modules 140CPU53414B CPU Module Overview This unit provides information on the specifications, LED indicators and description and error codes for the 140CPU53414B Controller Module. This module is functionally identical to the non-"B" version, however, the following should be considered: z If you are using the module in a Hot Standby topology, then you must use either two non-"A", or two "A" or two "B" models. z The "B" version requires a new flash executive.
PAGE 215
CPU Modules Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the CPU53414B Controller module. Specifications User Logic/Reference Capacity 984 Ladder Logic Discrete Register Extended Register IEC Application Memory 64 k words 64 k 57 k 96 k 2.
PAGE 216
CPU Modules Specifications Service Life Shelf Life 1200 mAh 10 years with 0.5% loss of capacity per year Battery Load Current at Power-off Typical 14 μA Maximum 420 μA Communication Modbus (RS-232) 2 serial port (9-pin D-shell) Modbus Plus (RS-485) 1 network port (9-pin D-shell) Programming Software Capability Modsoft, version 2.6 Concept 2.2 with SR2 (LL984 only) Concept 2.5 Concept 2.6 ProWorx 32 ProWorx NxT, version 2.0 ProWorx Plus, version 1.05 Unity Pro 3.
PAGE 217
CPU Modules LED Indicators and Descriptions The following figure shows the LED indicators. Ready Run Bat Low Modbus Modbus + Error A Mem Prt The following table provides a description of the LED indicators for the 140CPU53414B module. LED Descriptions LEDS Color Indication when On Ready Green The CPU has passed power-up diagnostics. Run Green The CPU has been started and is solving logic. Bat Low Red Modbus Green The battery needs replacing or is not present.
PAGE 218
CPU Modules LED Error Codes The following table shows the run LED error codes for the 140CPU53414B.
PAGE 219
CPU Modules LED Error Codes Number of Blinks Code 4 604 5 Error UPI timeout error 605 bad UPI response opcode 606 UPI bus diagnostic error 607 modbus cmd-buffer overflow 608 modbus cmd-length is zero 609 modbus abort command error 614 mbp bus interface error 615 bad mbp response opcode 616 timeout waiting for mbp 617 mbp out of synchronization 618 mbp invalid path 619 page 0 not paragraph aligned 61E bad external uart hardware 61F bad external uart interrupt 620 bad receive
PAGE 220
CPU Modules Note: Information in the Code column is visible only with the Flash download utility. 220 35013379 02 October 2007 This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., Inc. 800-473-9123 www.barr-thorp.
PAGE 221
CPU Modules Front Panel Slide Switch The slide switch, located on the front of the CPU, is used to select the comm parameter settings for the Modbus (RS232) ports. Three options are available. 1. Setting the switch to the top position assigns ASCII functionality to the port. 2. Setting the switch to the middle position assigns remote terminal unit (RTU) functionality to the port. 3. Setting the switch to the bottom position lets you assign comm parameters to the port in software.
PAGE 222
CPU Modules The following table shows the valid comm port parameters. Valid Comm Port Parameters Baud 19,200 1,200 9,600 600 7,200 300 4,800 150 3,600 134.5 2,400 110 2,000 75 1,800 50 Parity Enable/Disable Odd/Even Data Bits 7/8 Stop Bits 1/2 Device Address 1 ... 247 222 35013379 02 October 2007 This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., Inc. 800-473-9123 www.barr-thorp.
PAGE 223
CPU Modules Key Switch The following figure shows the key switch. Mem Prt Stop Mem Prt Start Stop Start Note: The key switch positions shown next to the switch (above, left) are for reference only and are marked on the module as indicated on the right. The CPU53414B has 1435KByte of Flash EPROM memory, which can be used to save the program and the initial values of variables.
PAGE 224
CPU Modules Key Switch Description The following table provides a description of the key switch information. Key Switch Description Key Switch Position Controller Status Memory Protected From Programmer Changes Will Accept Programmer Stop or Start Stop Controller is stopped and disables Programmer changes. Y N From Start or Memory Protect: Stops controller, if running, and disables Programmer changes Mem Prt Controller may be either stopped or running and Programmer changes are disabled.
PAGE 225
CPU Modules Rear Panel Switches The following figure shows the SW1 and SW2 settings. 9 0 1 8 2 SW1 (TOP) 7 3 4 5 6 9 0 1 8 2 SW2 (BOTTOM) 7 3 4 5 6 SW1 sets the upper digit (tens) of the address. SW2 sets the lower digit (ones) of the address. The following table shows the SW1 and SW2 address settings. SW1 and SW2 Address Settings Node Address SW1 SW2 1 ... 9 0 1 ... 9 10 ... 19 1 0 ... 9 20 ... 29 2 0 ... 9 30 ... 39 3 0 ... 9 40 ... 49 4 0 ... 9 50 ... 59 5 0 ...
PAGE 226
CPU Modules Modbus Ports Pinout Connections The following figure shows the Modbus port pinout connections for 9-pin and 25-pin connections.
PAGE 227
CPU Modules Modbus Ports Pinout Connections for Portable Computers The following figure shows the Modbus port pinout connections for 9-pin portable computers. IBM-AT 9-Pin Female Quantum 9-Pin Male CD SHIELD RX RX TX TX DTR DTR GRND GRND DSR DSR RTS RTS CTS CTS NC NC The following is the abbreviation key for the above figures.
PAGE 228
CPU Modules 228 35013379 02 October 2007 This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., Inc. 800-473-9123 www.barr-thorp.
PAGE 229
Quantum Field Bus Modules 8 At a Glance Overview This chapter contains information on various Quantum Field Bus Modules. What's in this Chapter? This chapter contains the following topics: Topic Page 140CRP81100 Profibus DP Master Communications Module 230 140EIA92100 Quantum AS-i Master Module 236 140NOA6XXXX Quantum InterBus Communications Modules 242 140NOL911X0 Quantum LonWorks Network Option Modules 250 229 35013379 02 October 2007 This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., Inc.
PAGE 230
Quantum Field Bus Modules 140CRP81100 Profibus DP Master Communications Module Overview The following information describes the 140CRP81100 Field Bus Communication Module, which provides interface to Profibus-DP networks for the Quantum Automation Series systems.
PAGE 231
Quantum Field Bus Modules Communicatons Module View of the 140CRP81100 communications module and the Profibus tap: Module Model Number LED Status Display Customer Identification Label (Fold label and place it inside door) Removable Door Part #043513804 RS-232C port PCMCIA Card (467NHP911) PROFIBUS RS-485 Port Profibus Tap (490NAE911) 231 35013379 02 October 2007 This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., Inc. 800-473-9123 www.barr-thorp.
PAGE 232
Quantum Field Bus Modules LED Status The following figure shows the LED Status display. Active Ready Fault Backplane PROFIBUS DP S/R Load The following table provides descriptions of the Status LEDs. LEDs Color Function Active Green On Ready Green On Module is operational Fault Red On Indicates fault. Refer to LED fault codes in manual 840USE46800. Backplane Green Flashing Indicates fault. Refer to LED fault codes in manual 840USE46800.
PAGE 233
Quantum Field Bus Modules WARNING Hot Swapping Restriction Modules may be hot swapped when the area is known to be non-hazardous. Do not hot swap modules in a Class 1, Division 2 environment. Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage. PROFIBUS RS485 Port d-Sub pinouts Below are the pinouts for the PROFIBUS RS-485 port.
PAGE 234
Quantum Field Bus Modules Legend to pinouts for the RS-232C port: Pin Signal 2 RXD Received Data 3 TXD Transmitted Data 5 GND Signal Ground 7 RTS Request to Send 8 CTS Clear to Send 234 Function 35013379 02 October 2007 This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., Inc. 800-473-9123 www.barr-thorp.
PAGE 235
Quantum Field Bus Modules Specifications The following table shows the technical specifications for the 140CRP81100 Communication Module: Specifications Programming software Modsoft version 2.32 or greater Concept version 2.2 or greater Bus current required 1.2 A Power dissipation 6.5 W Data Interface RS-232C 9 pin D-shell non-isolated, Shielded cable, 3 m max; 19.2 Kbps default. RS-485 Profibus, up to 12 Mbps Installation Local backplane only Bus Specifications Bus nodes max.
PAGE 236
Quantum Field Bus Modules 140EIA92100 Quantum AS-i Master Module Overview The 140EIA92100 field bus communications module provides communications interface to AS-i networks for the Quantum Automation Series systems. Related Documentation For more detailed information see Modicon Quantum AS-i Master Module manual, part number 840USE11700, or start the newmod.hlp from your Concept CD. To locate it, go to the root of your Concept Installation directory. Example of path: Drive_X:\Concept\*.
PAGE 237
Quantum Field Bus Modules Communications Module The following diagram provides a view of the 140EIA92100 communications module. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 LED Display AS-i (Red): ON shows the module is not powered. Flashing shows automatic addressing enabled. SLV/BUS (Green): ON when LEDs 0-31 are in bus display mode. I/O Status (Green): ON when LEDs 0-31 are in slave display mode. Mode (Push Button): Press and hold this button to change from slave mode to bus mode.
PAGE 238
Quantum Field Bus Modules LED Display and Descriptions Diagram of the LED display: Active B 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 F 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 The following table provides LED descriptions. LED Descriptions LED Color Description Active Green Bus communication is present. F Red B Green Communication exists between master and slaves. 0-31 Green Slave indicators. Fault on the AS-i bus.
PAGE 239
Quantum Field Bus Modules LED Bus Mode Each indicator lamp 1-31 corresponds to a slave address on the bus. z z z On: Slave is present. Flashing: Slave is mapped but not detected, or detected but not mapped. It may also be projected and detected, but not activated (bad profile or I/O code). Off: Slave is neither mapped nor detected.
PAGE 240
Quantum Field Bus Modules LED Diagnostics State of Indicator Lamps: B Active F X (1) X (2) X X Indicator lamp is on. Meaning Corrective Action Module switched off. Switch the device on. Operating in Protected Mode (normal). Displaying Outputs. æ Operating in Protected Mode (normal). Displaying Inputs. æ Fault on AS-i bus (selfprogramming possible). Replace the faulty slave with a new identical slave. Fault on AS-i bus (selfConnect the terminal. programming not possible).
PAGE 241
Quantum Field Bus Modules AS-i Cable Connection The following figure shows the AS-i cable connection: Brown wire AS-i cable AS-i− (Blue) Connector AS-i+ (Brown) Blue wire Specifications The following table provides specifications for the 140EIA92100 AS-i module: Specifications Master profile Bus length I/O # slaves Power supply Scan time Transmission Polarity reversal M2 100m max, no repeaters 124IN/124OUT 31 max 30Vdc @ 120mA max 156 msec x (n+2) if n < 31 156 msec x (n+1) if n = 31 167 kbits/sec
PAGE 242
Quantum Field Bus Modules 140NOA6XXXX Quantum InterBus Communications Modules Overview This section includes information for the NOA6XXXX InterBus communications modules which provide interface to InterBus networks for the Quantum Automation Series systems.
PAGE 243
Quantum Field Bus Modules Specifications The following table shows the InterBus specifications. Specifications Data Interface InterBus RS-485, isolated (500 V test voltage) RS-232C maximum cable length As per DIN 66 020, non-isolated 20 m shielded Data Transfer Frequency 500 kbaud Connection Styles Interbus RS-232C (Use cable part number 990NAA26320 or 990NAA26350) Bus Current Required 700 mA Power Dissipation Max. 3.7 W, typically 2.
PAGE 244
Quantum Field Bus Modules LED Indicators and Descriptions for NOA611X0 The following figure shows the NOA611X0 LED indicators. Active R IB-S Run F Master RBUS LBUS Slave DEA202 Memory Start Up BS Off The following table shows the NOA611X0 LED descriptions. LED Descriptions LEDs Color Function R Green Ready. The firmware is running correctly and the module is ready for service. Active Green Bus communication is active. F Red IB-S Run Green Fault. A fault occurred on the module.
PAGE 245
Quantum Field Bus Modules LED Indicators and Descriptions for NOA62200 The following figure shows the NOA62200 LED indicators. 140 NOA 622 00 INTERBUS Master R Active IBS-RUN F Slave The following table shows the NOA62200 LED descriptions. LED Descriptions LEDs Color Status R Green On Flashing Meaning Ready. The switch-on routine was completed successfully. The firmware is running correctly and the module is ready for operations. RAM and checksum are ok. No firmware; or firmware is being loaded.
PAGE 246
Quantum Field Bus Modules Seven Segment Display The seven segment display is only applicable to the NOA61110 module. Display 0 –||– –– Front Panel Connections and Controls Meaning Interbus is not able to run. Interbus is able to run but stopped. Interbus is running. RBUS LED on Number of the defective remote bus segments. LBUS LED on Number of the defective peripheral bus. RBUS & LBUS LEDs on Bus segment fault, interbus comm stopped. Faulted bus segment number (or next segment) displayed.
PAGE 247
Quantum Field Bus Modules Connect the remote bus cable to the female connector port labeled interbus. The following figure shows the InterBus port connection. INTERBUS remote bus InterBus Port The following table shows the key to the remote bus.
PAGE 248
Quantum Field Bus Modules Use a Modbus data cable, Part Number 990NAA26320 (2.7 m) or Part Number 990NAA26350 (15.5 m). The following figure shows the RS-232C port connection. RS 232 C RS-232C Port The following table shows the key to the RS-232C port. Pin Signal Function 2 D2 (RXD) Received Data 3 D1 (TXD) Transmitted Data 5 E2 (GND) Signal Ground 7 S2 (RTS) Request to Send 8 M2 (CTS) Clear to Send Black circle = Pin occupied.
PAGE 249
Quantum Field Bus Modules Comparison of NOA61100, 61110, and 62200 Modules The following table provides a comparison of the NOA61100, 61110, and 62200 modules. NOA61100 NOA61110 NOA62200 Physical Addressing Characteristics Y Y Y Logical Addressing N Y Y PCP Channel N Y Y Possible via userprogram triggering one of the active bits 10 ...
PAGE 250
Quantum Field Bus Modules 140NOL911X0 Quantum LonWorks Network Option Modules Overview The NOL modules provide connectivity between a Modicon Quantum controller and a control network based on Echelon’s LonWorks technology. Once the NOL module has been installed in a Quantum backplane and configured, it can be bound to an existing LonWorks network, and installed as a standard node. Note: The NOL module requires a valid LonWorks configuration file (.
PAGE 251
Quantum Field Bus Modules Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the NOL911X0 module. Specifications Data Transfer Frequency Connection Styles 78 Kbps (140 NOL 911 10) Screw terminals, telephone jack Bus Current Required 400 mA Quantum Controllers Remote I/O V2.0 at a minimum V2.0 at a minimum 251 35013379 02 October 2007 This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., Inc. 800-473-9123 www.barr-thorp.
PAGE 252
Quantum Field Bus Modules LED Indicators, Descriptions, and Status The condition of the NOL module is indicated by the status (off, on, or blinking) of the LED indicators. The following figure shows the LED indicators. Active Ready MSG In MSG Out Wink Srvc The following table shows the LED descriptions. LED Descriptions LEDs Function Active Bus communication is present. Ready Module has passed internal diagnostics, and is configured.
PAGE 253
Quantum Field Bus Modules LED Indicator Status LED Color Condition of NOL Module Powered Up Not Configured Not Programmed Powered Up Configured Not Programmed Error Condition Normal Operation Configured Programmed MSG Out Green Off Off Blink N/A Wink Green Off Off Blink on command Blink3 Srvc Yellow Off Blink Off N/A z z z Wink LED Error Codes If not lit, either the LON module requires configuration and mapping or is not communicating with the CPU by way of the DX Loadable.
PAGE 254
Quantum Field Bus Modules Front Panel Connectors There are three connectors located on the front of the NOL module. These are the RS-232 configuration port; the primary LonWorks communication port; and the auxiliary LonWorks configuration port. RS-232 Configuration Port This 9 pin, D-shell, female, RS-232 compatible serial port’s attributes are: z z z z Configured at a fixed rate of 9600 baud, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, and no parity. Used to download configuration and new firmware to the module.
PAGE 255
Quantum Field Bus Modules Auxiliary LonWorks Communication Port This is the auxiliary interface for wiring into a LonWorks network. The connector is an eight position RJ-45 (phone jack) socket. The figure below shows the Pin 1 connector. Pin 1 Note: The Auxiliary LonWorks Communications Port is not intended to be connected to any public telecommunications network. Both the Primary and Secondary ports provide standard interfaces to LonWorks networks and are wired in parallel for flexibility.
PAGE 256
Quantum Field Bus Modules NOL Module Media Types The NOL module supports three twisted pair media types with different network topologies or data transfer speeds.
PAGE 257
Distributed I/O (DIO) for the Quantum Modules 9 At a Glance Introduction This chapter provides information on the distributed I/O (DIO) modules.
PAGE 258
DIO 140CRA21X10 Quantum Distributed I/O (DIO) Modules Overview This section includes specifications and wiring diagrams for the Modbus Plus Distributed I/O AC powered single (CRA21110) and dual (CRA21210) channel modules. DIO Module The following figure shows the parts of the distributed I/O (DIO) module.
PAGE 259
DIO Specifications The following specifications are for the Modbus Plus CRA21110 and CRA21210 AC powered single and dual channel DIO modules. Specifications Input Requirements Input Voltage 85 ... 276 Vac Input Frequency Input Voltage Total Harmonic Distortion 47 ... 63 Hz Less than 10% of the fundamental rms value Input Current 0.4 A @ 115 Vac. 0.2 A @ 230 Vac Inrush Current 10 A @ 115 Vac.
PAGE 260
DIO Wiring Diagram The following figure shows the wiring diagram for the 140CRA21110 and 21210 wiring diagram. NOT USED NOT USED NOT USED NOT USED AC L AC N Note: See Power and Grounding Considerations for AC and DC Powered Systems, p. 776 for power and grounding wiring guidelines and operational information. 260 35013379 02 October 2007 This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., Inc. 800-473-9123 www.barr-thorp.
PAGE 261
DIO LED Indicators and Descriptons The following figure shows the LED panel. Ready Fault Pwr ok Error A Modbus + Error B The following table shows the DIO LED indicators and descriptions. LED Descriptions LEDS Color Indication when On Ready Green Fault Red Pwr ok Green Bus power is present. Modbus + Green Communications are active on the Modbus Plus port. Error A Red Communication error on the Modbus Plus Channel A (dual cable only).
PAGE 262
DIO Rear Panel Switches Two rotary switches (refer to the following illustration and table) are located on the rear panel of the CPU. They are used for setting Modbus Plus node addresses for the unit. SW1 (the top switch) sets the upper digit (tens) of the address; SW2 (the bottom switch) sets the lower digit (ones) of the address. The illustration below shows the correct setting for an example address of 11.
PAGE 263
DIO 140CRA21X20 Quantum Distributed I/O (DIO) Modules Overview This section includes specifications and wiring diagrams for the Modbus Plus Distributed I/O DC powered single (CRA21120) and dual (21220) channel modules. DIO Module The following figure shows the parts of the Distributed I/O (DIO) module.
PAGE 264
DIO Specifications The following specifications are for the Modbus Plus CRA21120 and CRA21220 DC powered single and dual channel DIO modules. Specifications Input Requirements Input Voltage 20 ... 30 Vdc Input Current 1.6 A Inrush Current 30 A Input Power Interruption 1.0 ms max Fusing (external) 2.5 A (Part #043503948 or equivalent) Operating Mode Standalone or not powered (See Power and Grounding Guidelines, p. 775). Output to Bus Voltage 5.
PAGE 265
DIO Wiring Diagram The following figure shows the wiring diagram for the 140CRA21110 and 21210 wiring diagram. NOT USED NOT USED –24VDC (Common) +24VDC AC L AC N Note: See Power and Grounding Considerations for AC and DC Powered Systems, p. 776 for power and grounding wiring guidelines and operational information. 265 35013379 02 October 2007 This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., Inc. 800-473-9123 www.barr-thorp.
PAGE 266
DIO LED Indicators and Descriptions The following figure shows the LED panel. Ready Fault Pwr ok Error A Modbus + Error B The following table shows the DIO LED indicators and descriptions. LED Descriptions LEDS Color Indication when On Ready Green The module has passed power-up diagnostics. Fault Red A communications error exists between the DIO module and one or more I/O modules or an output module is not being written to over the Modbus Plus network. Pwr ok Green Bus power is present.
PAGE 267
DIO Rear Panel Switches Two rotary switches (refer to the illustration and table that follow) are located on the rear panel of the CPU. They are used for setting Modbus Plus node addresses for the unit. SW1 (the top switch) sets the upper digit (tens) of the address; SW2 (the bottom switch) sets the lower digit (ones) of the address. The illustration shows the correct setting for an example address of 11.
PAGE 268
DIO 268 35013379 02 October 2007 This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., Inc. 800-473-9123 www.barr-thorp.
PAGE 269
Quantum Remote I/O Communication Modules 10 At a Glance Introduction Quantum networking modules provide open, standards-based networking and fieldbus connectivity using Modbus, Modbus Plus, Ethernet, InterBus, SY/MAX and LonWorks networks. Specifications for these modules are included below.
PAGE 270
Networking 140CRP93X00 Remote I/O (RIO) Head Single and Dual Channel Module Overview The Remote I/O Head Single and Dual Channel modules are installed in the same backplane as the system controlling CPU modules. The RIO head is used to transfer data bi-directionally between the CPU and RIO drop modules installed in separate backplanes. A coaxial cable network is used to interconnect the RIO head module and one or more RIO drop modules.
PAGE 271
Networking Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the Remote I/O Head Single and Dual Channel modules. Specifications Drop Type Quantum, 200 Series, 500 Series, 800 Series, or SY/MAX (any mix) Drops 31 max Words/Drop ASCII 64 In / 64 Out 2 ports/drop, 32 ports (16 drops) max Requires the use of AS-P892-000, AS-J892-101/102, or AS-J290-0X0 at the RIO drops. Coax Termination Internal 75Ω Coax Shield Tied to chassis ground Data Transfer Rate 1.
PAGE 272
Networking CAUTION CONNECTIVITY COMPLIANCE To maintain CE compliance with the European Directive on EMC (89/336/EEC), the RIO head module must be connected using quad shielded cable (see the Remote I/O Cable System Planning and Installation Guide, 890USE10000, V2.0). Failure to follow this instruction can result in injury or equipment damage. LED Indicators and Descriptions The following figure shows the LED indicators for the RIO Head module.
PAGE 273
Networking LED Error Codes The Blinking Com Act LED error codes for the RIO Head module table show the number of times the Com Act LED on the RIO Head module blinks for each type of error and the crash codes for each (all codes are in hex).
PAGE 274
Networking LED Error Codes Number of Blinks Code Error 8003 Unexpected executive return 274 35013379 02 October 2007 This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., Inc. 800-473-9123 www.barr-thorp.
PAGE 275
Networking 140CRA93X00 Quantum RIO Adapter Drop Single and Dual Channel Module Overview The Remote I/O Drop Single and Dual Channel modules are used to transfer data bi-directionally over a coaxial cable network between I/O modules installed in the same (RIO drop) backplane and the RIO head installed in the CPU backplane. RIO Drop Module The following figure shows the components of the Remote I/O (RIO) drop module. The specific module shown is the CRA93200.
PAGE 276
Networking Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the Remote I/O Drop Single and Dual Channel modules. Specifications I/O Type Quantum Words/Drop 64 In / 64 Out Coax Termination Internal 75 Ω Coax Shield Capacitor to ground Data Transfer Rate 1.
PAGE 277
Networking LED Indicators and Description The following figure shows the LED indicators for the Drop module. Ready Fault Error A Com Act Error B The following table shows the RIO Drop module LED descriptions. LED Descriptions LEDS Color Indication when On Ready Green The module has passed power-up diagnostics. Com Act Green The module is communicating on the RIO network. Fault Red Unable to communicate with one or more I/O modules. Error A Red Communication error on Channel A.
PAGE 278
Networking LED Error Codes Blinking Com Act LED error codes for the RIO Drop module table show the number of times the Com Act LED on the RIO Drop module blinks for each type of error and the crash codes for each (all codes are in hex).
PAGE 279
Networking Rear Panel Switches Two rotary switches are located on the rear panel of the RIO Drop Modules and are used for setting RIO drop addresses (refer to the following illustration and table). SW1 (top switch) sets the upper digit (tens); SW2 (bottom switch) sets the lower digit (ones). The illustration below shows the correct setting for an example address of 11.
PAGE 280
Networking 280 35013379 02 October 2007 This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., Inc. 800-473-9123 www.barr-thorp.
PAGE 281
Quantum Modbus Plus Network Option Modules 11 140NOM21X00 Quantum Modbus Plus Network Option Modules Overview The following information describes the single and dual channel twisted-pair cable NOM21X00 modules, which provide interface to Modbus Plus networks. Modbus Plus Module The following figure shows the components of the Modbus Plus 140NOM21X00 modules.
PAGE 282
Modbus Plus NOMs Specifications The Modbus Plus Head Single and Dual Channel modules provide extended communication capabilities for the Quantum system within a Modbus Plus configuration. The following table shows the specifications show the Modbus Plus single and dual channel modules. Specifications Communication Ports NOM21100 1 Modbus Plus network (RS-485) port (9-pin connector) NOM21200 2 Modbus Plus network (RS-485) ports (9-pin connectors) for dual connectivity on a single Modbus Plus network.
PAGE 283
Modbus Plus NOMs LED Indicators and Descriptions The following figure shows the Modbus Plus NOM LED indicators. Ready Run Modbus Modbus + Error A Error B The following table shows the Modbus Plus NOM LED Descriptions. LED Descriptions LEDs Color Indication when On Ready Green The module has passed power-up diagnostics. Run Green Indicates that the unit is in kernel mode–should always be OFF during normal operations.
PAGE 284
Modbus Plus NOMs LED Error Codes The blinking Run LED error codes for the NOM module shows the number of times the Run LED on the NOM module blinks for each type of error and the crash codes for each (all codes are in hex).
PAGE 285
Modbus Plus NOMs LED Error Codes Number of Blinks Code Error 62dH bad modbus state tmr0_evt 62eH bad uart interrupt 631H UPI timeout error 632H bad UPI response opcode 633H UPI bus diagnostic error 634H mbp bus interference error 635H bad mbp response opcode 636H timeout waiting for mbp 637H mbp out of synchronization 638H mbp invalid path 639H peer did not respond with complement of the opcode 63AH peer unable to come out of transitions at power-up 681h bad master state 682h
PAGE 286
Modbus Plus NOMs Rear Panel Switches Two rotary switches are located on the rear panel of the modules. They are used together to set the Modbus Plus node and Modbus port address for the unit. Note: The highest address that may be set with these switches is 64. Rotary SW1 (top switch) sets the upper digit (tens), and rotary SW2 (bottom switch) sets the lower digit (ones) of the Modbus Plus node address. The illustration below shows the setting for an example address of 11.
PAGE 287
Modbus Plus NOMs Front Panel Switches Two, three-position slide switches are located on the front of the unit. The threeposition slide switch on the right is used to select the comm parameter settings for the Modbus (RS-232) port provided with the Modbus Plus option module. Three options are available, as shown in the following illustration. ASCII RTU mem Note: If the left-hand switch is in the upper position and right-hand switch is set to mem then, as of firmware version 2.
PAGE 288
Modbus Plus NOMs Setting the slide switch to the bottom position gives you the ability to assign comm parameters to the port in software; the following parameters are valid. Valid Comm Port Parameters Baud 19,200 1,200 9,600 600 7,200 300 4,800 150 3,600 134.5 2,400 110 2,000 75 1,800 50 Data Bits 7/8 Stop Bits 1/2 Parity Enable/Disable Odd/Even Device Address Rear panel rotary switch setting 288 35013379 02 October 2007 This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., Inc.
PAGE 289
Modbus Plus NOMs Modbus Connector Pinouts The NOM modules are equipped with a nine-pin RS-232C connector that supports Modicon’s proprietary Modbus communication protocol. The following figure shows the Modbus port pinout connections for 9-pin (left) and 25-pin (right) connections.
PAGE 290
Modbus Plus NOMs Modbus Ports Pinout Connections for Portable Computers The following figure shows the Modbus port pinout connections for nine-pin portable (laptop) computers. IBM-AT 9-Pin Female Quantum 9-Pin Male CD SHIELD RX RX TX TX DTR DTR GRND GRND DSR DSR RTS RTS CTS CTS NC NC The following is the abbreviation key for the above figures.
PAGE 291
Quantum Modbus Plus Networking on Fiber Module 12 140NOM25200 Quantum Networking Modbus Plus on Fiber Module Overview The following information pertains to the Modbus Plus on Fiber module, 140NOM25200. The Modbus Plus on Fiber module provides connectivity to Modbus Plus nodes by fiber cable. There are many benefits that result from the use of fiber optics.
PAGE 292
Modbus Plus NOM Modbus Plus on Fiber Module The following figure shows the parts of the Modbus Plus 140NOM25200 module.
PAGE 293
Modbus Plus NOM LED Indicators and Descriptions The following figure shows the Modbus Plus on Fiber LED indicators. Ready Run Modbus Modbus+ Fport 1 Fport 2 FRNGoff The following table shows the Modbus Plus on Fiber LED descriptions. LED Descriptions LEDs Color Indication when On Ready Green The module has passed powerup diagnostics. Run Green Indicates that the unit is in kernel mode – should always be OFF during normal operations.
PAGE 294
Modbus Plus NOM Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the NOM25200 module. Specifications General Communication Ports Optical Ports Modbus Port Transmission/Data Rate Optical Interface 2 (consisting of an optical receiver and transmitter) 1 RJ45 (phone jack-type) connector 1 Mbit/second for Modbus Plus with Bi-Phase S encoded data ST-Type connectors Pulse Width Distortions and Jitter 5 ns or better Wavelength Power Loss Budget (includes 3 dB of system margins).
PAGE 295
Modbus Plus NOM Specifications Diagnostics Power Up Runtime RAM RAM RAM Address RAM Address Executive Checksum Executive Checksum Processor Power Dissipation 4W Bus Current Required External Power Front Panel Switch 750 mA max Not required for this module A three-position slide switch is located on the front of the unit. This switch is used to select the comm parameter settings for the Modbus (RS-232) port.
PAGE 296
Modbus Plus NOM RTU Comm Port Parameters Stop Bits 1 Device Address Rear panel rotary switch setting Setting the slide switch to the bottom position gives you the ability to assign comm parameters to the port in software. The following parameters are valid. Valid Mem Comm Port Parameters Baud 19,200 1,200 9,600 600 7,200 300 4,800 150 3,600 134.
PAGE 297
Modbus Plus NOM Rear Panel Switches Two rotary switches are located on the rear panel of the modules. They are used together to set the Modbus Plus node and Modbus port address for the unit. Note: The highest address that may be set with these switches is 64. Rotary SW1 (top switch) sets the upper digit (tens), and rotary SW2 (bottom switch) sets the lower digit (ones) of the Modbus Plus node address. The following illustration shows the setting for an example address of 11.
PAGE 298
Modbus Plus NOM Modbus Connector The NOM25200 module is equipped with an RS-232 port (see below) located on the front of the module. This port uses an eight-position RJ45 (phone jack-type) connector. The following figure shows the NOM25200 Pin 1 connector. Pin 1 Note: A D-shell adapter is available from Modicon for NOM 252 00-to-computer connections: a (110 XCA 20 300) 9-pin adapter for PC-AT type computers (see the illustration pinout table below).
PAGE 299
Modbus Plus NOM The following figure shows the 9-pin RJ45 connector schematic. Connectors Pinouts RJ45 Connector 9-pin D-shell 1 1 DCD TXD 3 2 RXD RXD 4 3 TXD DSR 2 4 DTR GND 5 5 GDN 6 DRS CTS 7 7 RTS RTS 6 8 CTS 9 RI RJ45 Cable Types Chassis 8 Case of the Ground Connector This following figure shows the RJ45 connector, Modicon Part #110XCA2820X cable. The table provides part numbers and cable lengths.
PAGE 300
Modbus Plus NOM Fiber Optic Cable Connections The NOM25200 module is connected in the Quantum system by a fiber optic cable (see the following figure). The cable has two strands. Each module transmits a signal in one direction. For this reason, each strand must be connected to the transmit port on one module and the receive port on the other. One strand of the fiber optic cable is labelled every 10 inches with the manufacturer’s name and the cable specifications.
PAGE 301
Modbus Plus NOM Connecting the Fiber Optic Cable The following steps show how to connect the fiber optic cable. Step 1 Action Remove the protective plastic coverings from the cable ports and the tips of the cable. Snap one of the fiber cable clasps (shipped with the module) over the cable so that the wider end of the tool is closest to the cable end.
PAGE 302
Modbus Plus NOM Fiber Optic Configurations The following represent four typical configurations that show the wide range of the network architecture: z z z z Point-to-Point Configuration Point-to-Point connection, Bus configuration, Tree and Star configurations, Self Healing Ring configuration. Point-to-point configuration (see the following figure) allows communication over the distance of up to 3 km through harsh industrial environments. The following figure shows the point-to-point configuration.
PAGE 303
Modbus Plus NOM The following figure shows the mixed fiber optic/copper network.
PAGE 304
Modbus Plus NOM Tree Configuration The use of a tree configuration can provide flexibility in the layout of Modbus Plus and NOM 25200 networks. The following illustration shows an example of a tree configuration. Additional repeaters can be connected in order to extend communication between electrical links.
PAGE 305
Modbus Plus NOM Self Healing Ring Configuration This configuration can be achieved by connecting the unused fiber optic ports of the first and last NOM25200 directly or through the fiber optic repeater, if a mixed fiber optic/twisted pairs network is used. This type of connection has all the advantages of the previously described configurations, along with built-in redundancy.
PAGE 306
Modbus Plus NOM Hot Standby Systems The following figure shows the self healing ring configuration for hot standby systems example.
PAGE 307
Modbus Plus NOM Network Status The information about the condition of the network is presented in the form of Network Status. This information indicates the loss of connection (the first break in the self healing ring) and is similar to the way existing 140NOM21200 reports the loss of redundant cable. The break of the fiber cable will be detected by the module not receiving the signal from the side where the cable is broken and will be reported as a Cable B Framing error by MBPSTAT.
PAGE 308
Modbus Plus NOM Other Tools The following table shows other tools that may be needed for fiber optic links.
PAGE 309
Modbus Plus NOM Connections The following information discusses connecting the NOM25200 on fiber cable, adding a new mode to the network, and repairing the break in the cable. Note: When a new network is assembled, it is recommended that you connect all cables before powering up the system. Connect fiber optic cables as described previously in this section.
PAGE 310
Modbus Plus NOM Repairing the Break in the Cable Because the NOM25200 will stop transmitting in the direction from which it is not receiving the signal, the replacement of a broken fiber optic cable and the reconnection of it will not re-establish communication over that segment. The hot swap of only one NOM252 at the repaired connections is required to complete the connection.
PAGE 311
Quantum Ethernet Modules 13 At a Glance Introduction This chapter provides information on the NOE2X1 TCP/IP, NOE3X1 SY/MAX, NOE5X100 MMS, and NOE771xx Ethernet modules.
PAGE 312
Ethernet Modules 140NOE2X100 Quantum Ethernet TCP/IP Module Overview The Quantum NOE2X1TCP/IP is described in this section. This includes specifications for the NOE21100 and NOE25100 modules. Ethernet TCP/IP Module The following figure shows the Ethernet TCP/IP NOE2X100 module.
PAGE 313
Ethernet Modules LED Indicators and Descriptions The following figure shows the NOE2X100 LED indicators. Active Ready Fault Run Coll Link Kernel Appl The following table describes the meaning of each NOE2X100 LED indicator. LED Descriptions LEDs Color Indication when On Active Green Module is communicating with backplane. Ready Green Module has passed internal diagnostic tests. Run Green Flashes during normal operation. Link Green Ethernet link to hub is ok.
PAGE 314
Ethernet Modules Installation Example: Discovering the Default IP Network Address The following example shows the steps for discovering the default IP network address. Step 1 Action Locate the global address label on the front panel of the module. IEEE GLOBAL ADDRESS 0000540B72A8 2 Note the rightmost eight digits. 540B72A8 84.11.114.168 3 Convert them from hexadecimal to decimal. Each pair of hexadecimal numbers will result in a decimal number between 0 and 255. This is the default IP address.
PAGE 315
Ethernet Modules 140NOE3X100 Quantum Ethernet SY/MAX Modules Overview This section includes information for the NOE31100 and 35100 SY/MAX Ethernet modules. The Quantum SY/MAX Ethernet modules for twisted pair and fiber optic cabling provide an interface for the Quantum Automation Series system to SY/MAX devices via Ethernet. Related Documentation For more detailed information, see Quantum-SY/MAX-Ethernet Module User Guide, 840USE11100, Version 1.0.
PAGE 316
Ethernet Modules Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the SY/MAX Ethernet modules NOE31100 and 35100.
PAGE 317
Ethernet Modules LED Indicators and Descriptions The following figure shows the NOE3X100 LED indicators. Active Ready Fault Run Collision Link Kernel Appl The following table describes the meaning of each NOE3X100 indicator. LED Descriptions SY/MAX Addressing LEDs Color Indication when On Active Green Module is communicating with backplane. Ready Green Module has passed internal diagnostic tests. Run Green Flashes during normal operation. Link Green Ethernet connection is made.
PAGE 318
Ethernet Modules 140NOE5X100 Quantum Ethernet MMS Modules Overview The section includes information for the NOE5X100 MMS Ethernet modules, NOE51100 and NOE55100. The Quantum MMS Ethernet modules for twisted pair and fiber optic cabling provide an interface for the Quantum Automation Series system to MMS devices via Ethernet. Ethernet MMS Module The following figure shows the NOE5X100 MMS Ethernet modules.
PAGE 319
Ethernet Modules Specifications The following table shows the MMS Ethernet specifications.
PAGE 320
Ethernet Modules LED Indicators and Descriptions The following table shows the NOE5X100 LED indicators. Active Ready Fault Run Collision Link Kernel Appl The following table describes the meaning of each NOE5X100 indicator. LED Descriptions LEDs Color Indication when On Active Green Module is communicating with backplane. Ready Green Module has passed internal diagnostic tests. Run Green Flashes during normal operation. Link Green Ethernet connection is made.
PAGE 321
Ethernet Modules 140NOE771xx Ethernet Modules Overview The following provides information on the Quantum ethernet modules 140NOE77100, 140NOE77101, 140NOE77110, and 140NOE77111. Related Documentation Refer to Quantum NOE 771 xx Ethernet Modules User Guide, 840USE11600 for more detailed information on the installation and use of Quantum ethernet modules. Ethernet Module The following figure shows the NOE77100 Ethernet module.
PAGE 322
Ethernet Modules Specifications The main specifications for the Quantum 140NOE771xx Ethernet Modules are described in the following table Specifications Communication Ports One auto-sensing 10/100Base-T shielded twisted pair (RJ-45 connector) port and one 100Base-FX (MT-RJ connector) port. Both ports transmit and receive Modbus commands encapsulated in TCP/IP protocol. Only one port can be used at a time. Bus Current Required 750 mA Power Dissipation 3.
PAGE 323
Ethernet Modules LED Indicators and Descriptions The following figure shows the NOE771xx LED indicators. Active Ready Fault Run Link Coll Tx Act Rx Act 10MB 100MB Fduplex Kernel Appl The following table describes the meaning of each NOE771xx LED indicator. LED Descriptions LED Color Description Active Green Indicates the backplane is configured. Ready Green Fault Red Run Green Coll. Red Link Green On when Ethernet link is active.
PAGE 324
Ethernet Modules Run LED Status The following table lists each available state of the Run LED indicator and provides diagnostic information for that state Indicator State On (steady) Status Normal operation: The NOE module is ready for network communication. Number of flashes in sequence one Not used two Not used three No Link: the network cable is not connected or is defective. four Duplicate IP address: The module will be set to its default IP address.
PAGE 325
Ethernet Modules Key Features MODBUS I/O Scanner The key features of the 140 NOE 771 (-00, -01, -10, -11) models are listed below: -00 -01 -10 -11 HTTP Server X X X X FTP Server X X X X Flash File System X X X X BOOTP Client X X X X BOOTP Server X X X X SNMP V2 Agent X X X X MODBUS Messaging X X X X I/O Scanner X X Hot Standby X In Version 2.0 X X In Version 2.
PAGE 326
Ethernet Modules Peer Cop Based I/O Scanner The following table lists the characteristics of the Peer Cop based MODBUS I/O Scanner, which is available only on the NOE77100. Parameter Value Max. No. of Devices 64 Max. No. of Input Words 500 Max. No.
PAGE 327
Ethernet Modules Introduction – Server All NOE771xx Quantum Ethernet TCP/IP modules provide the user with the ability to access data from the controller using the standard MODBUS/TCP protocol. Any device: PC, HMI package, another PLC, or any MODBUS/TCP compliant device can access data from the PLC. The MODBUS/TCP Server also allows programming panels to log into the controller over Ethernet. Limitations The NOE771xx supports up to 64 simultaneous MODBUS/TCP Server connections.
PAGE 328
Ethernet Modules The default user name is USER, and the default password is USERUSER. Both the user name and password are case sensitive. Refer to the Quantum NOE 771 xx Ethernet Modules User Guide for instructions about how to change the password, and how to add or delete user names to the FTP Server. There should be only one FTP client per module. 328 35013379 02 October 2007 This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., Inc. 800-473-9123 www.barr-thorp.
PAGE 329
Ethernet Modules HTTP Server The NOE771xx’s HyperText Transport Protocol (HTTP) Server is available as soon as the module receives an IP address. It can be used with version 4.0 or greater of either the Internet Explorer or Netscape browser.
PAGE 330
Ethernet Modules BOOTP Server Note: The BOOTP Server is available on the 140NOE771 -00 and -10 models. The BOOTstrap Protocol (BOOTP) software, compliant with RFC 951, is used to assign IP addresses to nodes on an Ethernet network. Devices (hosts) on the network issue BOOTP requests during their initialization sequence, and a BOOTP Server that receives the request will extract the required IP address information from its database and place it in BOOTP response messages to the requesting devices.
PAGE 331
Ethernet Modules DHCP Server Note: The DHCP Server is available on the 140NOE771x1 models. Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) is a superset of the BOOTP Protocol. Your 140NOE771x1 has a DHCP Server. The DHCP Server is compliant with RFC 1531. The DHCP Server can be used to provide the IP configuration to devices using BOOTP or devices using DHCP.
PAGE 332
Ethernet Modules Key Features of Global Data The main features for Global Data are: One Publisher and many Subscribers z A device can publish one network variable of up to 512 registers z A device can subscribe to several network variables of up to 2048 4x registers z A device subscribes to the complete network variable z One distribution group per network IP address z Application defined publication rate z Up to 64 Global Data network variables (numbered from 1 to 64) can be part of the data distribution
PAGE 333
Ethernet Modules Results are returned as percentages. CPU time spent in other services is shown as "Other" or "Free." Bandwidth Monitoring uses the same functions as used by SNMP.
PAGE 334
Ethernet Modules 334 35013379 02 October 2007 This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., Inc. 800-473-9123 www.barr-thorp.
PAGE 335
Intelligent/Special Purpose Modules for the Quantum 14 At a Glance Introduction This chapter provides information on the following intelligent/special purpose modules: z z z z z z What's in this Chapter? Five Channel High Speed Counter Module Two Channel High Speed Counter Module ASCII Interface Module High Speed Interrupt Module Single Axis Motion Modules Hot Standby Module This chapter contains the following topics: Topic Page 140EHC10500 High Speed Counter Module 336 I/O Configuration for 140EH
PAGE 336
Intelligent/Special Purpose 140EHC10500 High Speed Counter Module Overview This section provides specifications and descriptions of the high speed counter modules EHC10500, Five Channel Discrete High Speed Counter. The High Speed Counter module is a discrete counter for proximity and magnetic pickups. Related Documentation For more detailed information on the planning, installation and use of this module, refer to the Quantum Automation Series 140EHC10500 Module User Guide, part number 840USE44300.
PAGE 337
Intelligent/Special Purpose Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the EHC10500 high speed counter. Specifications Number of Channels 5 counter inputs, 8 digital inputs, and 8 digital outputs LEDs Active F R (Green) - Module is ready 1 ... 8 (Green - left column) - Discrete Inputs (IN1 ... IN8) C1 ... C5 (Green - middle column) - Discrete Counter Inputs (C1 ... C5) 1 ... 8 (Green - right column) - Discrete Outputs (OUT1 ...
PAGE 338
Intelligent/Special Purpose Specifications Fault Detection Power Dissipation Bus Current Required External 24 Vdc Power Supply External Fusing Compatibility Loss of output field power, output short circuit ≤6W 250 mA 19.2 ... 30 Vdc, 24 Vdc nominal, 60 mA required plus the load current for each output User discretion Programming Software: Modsoft V2.32 or Concept 2.0 at a minimum Quantum Controllers: All, V2.0 at a minimum 338 35013379 02 October 2007 This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co.
PAGE 339
Intelligent/Special Purpose LED Indicators and Descriptions The following figure shows the LED indicators for the EHC10500 high speed counter. R Active F 1 C1 1 P 2 C2 2 3 C3 3 4 C4 4 5 C5 5 6 7 6 7 8 8 The following table shows the LED descriptions for the EHC10500 high speed counter. LED Descriptions LEDs Color Indication when On Active Green F Red R Green Indicates firmware initialization is complete and the module is ready for service. 1 ...
PAGE 340
Intelligent/Special Purpose Wiring Diagram The following figure show the EHC10500 wiring diagram. N/C 5 Vdc C1 2 1 4 3 6 5 8 7 N/C 5 Vdc Counter Input Signals (C1...C5) 5 Vdc C2 N/C 5 Vdc C3 N/C + – 5 Vdc C4 5 Vdc To M11 5 Vdc C5 N/C 10 9 12 11 14 13 16 15 18 17 M11 M12 24 Vdc C1 24 Vdc Counter Input Signals (C1...
PAGE 341
Intelligent/Special Purpose Note: 1. N / C = Not Connected. 2. Terminals 29 and 30 are common and are jumpered together. 341 35013379 02 October 2007 This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., Inc. 800-473-9123 www.barr-thorp.
PAGE 342
Intelligent/Special Purpose I/O Configuration for 140EHC20200 Overview This section describes configuration of the 140EHC20200 high speed counter module which operates in pulse or quadrature mode and accepts single ended or differentiated inputs. I/O Map Register Assignment The 140EHC20200 high speed counter requires six contiguous output (4X) and six contiguous input (3X) registers in the I/O map. The 4X registers perform the same configuration tasks as the Modzoom screenassigned parameters.
PAGE 343
Intelligent/Special Purpose EHC20200 Operations Four operations can be performed: z z z z Command 1 CONFIGURES the Module Command 2 LOADS VALUES Command 3 READ INPUT COUNTER Command 4 READS RATE SAMPLE or LAST INPUT COUNT BEFORE PRESET Each operation uses one or more of both types of registers assigned to the module. In addition to the command definition byte, the first 4X register for all commands contain control bits to preset and enable/disable counters of either channel.
PAGE 344
Intelligent/Special Purpose Command 2 LOAD VALUES There are four formats for this command. It uses up to six 4X registers and six 3X registers as shown in the following figure. 4X 3X 4X+1 3X+1 4X+2 3X+2 4X+3 3X+3 4X+4 3X+4 4X+5 3X+5 Values loaded may be: z z z Command 3 READ INPUT COUNTER Maximum count and setpoint (i.e., output turn on times). Output assertion ON time duration (one input only). Rate sample time interval.
PAGE 345
Intelligent/Special Purpose Note: When Command 0 (4X = 00XX) or any other undefined commands are asserted in the 4X register, the 3X registers will contain the count inputs if in count mode (same as Command 3) and the rate sample values when in rate-sample mode (same as Command 4). Command 1 CONFIGURE, Output Register Format (4X = 01XX hex) The following figure shows the 4x output register for command 1.
PAGE 346
Intelligent/Special Purpose The following figure shows the 4x+2 output register for command 1. 4X+2 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Output 2A Operating Mode Output 2B Operating Mode Output 1A Operating Mode Output 1B Operating Mode Bits 000 001 010 011 100 101 110 111 Mode 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Description Disable Output ON if Count = Setpoint Latched ON if Count = Setpoint. Hardware RESET required to turn OFF ON if Count = Maximum Count Latched ON if Count = Maximum Count.
PAGE 347
Intelligent/Special Purpose Command 2. LOAD VALUES, Output Register Format (4X = 02XX hex) The LOAD VALUES 4X register format depends on the Counter/Rate Sample mode selected in Command 1, Register 4X+1, bits 11 and 12. If configured for two 16 bit Counters, Output Assert ON, the following figures, which shows counters for registers 4X through 4X+5, are displayed.
PAGE 348
Intelligent/Special Purpose If configured for one 32 bit Counter, Output Assert ON, the following figures, which show the counters for registers 4X through 4X+5, with low and high word, are displayed.
PAGE 349
Intelligent/Special Purpose If configured for two 32 bit Counters - NO Output Assert, the following figures, which show the 4X through 4X+4 counters, with low and high word, are displayed.
PAGE 350
Intelligent/Special Purpose If configured for Rate Sample Mode, the following figures, which show the 4X through 4X+2 counters, are displayed.
PAGE 351
Intelligent/Special Purpose Command 1 and Command 2 Response Formats The following figures show the 3X through 3X+5 response formats. 3X 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Configure or Load Values Command Byte 3X+1 to 3X+4 echoes 4X+1 to 4X+4 register contents.
PAGE 352
Intelligent/Special Purpose Command 3 Response Format The following figure shows the Command 3 response format. 3X 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Read Counter Inputs Command Byte 3X+1 and 3X+2 = Counter 1’s 16 or 32 bit Current Count. 3X+3 and 3X+4 = Counter 2’s 16 or 32 bit Current Count.
PAGE 353
Intelligent/Special Purpose Command 4 Response Format The following figures show the counters for 3X through 3X+5 for command 4. 3X 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Read Rate Sample/ Last Count Command Byte 3X+1 and 3X+2 = Counter 1’s 32 bit Rate Sample / Last Count Before Preset. 3X+3 and 3X+4 = Counter 2’s 32 bit Rate Sample / Last Count Before Preset.
PAGE 354
Intelligent/Special Purpose Using I/O Mapped Registers to Operate the High Speed Counter COUNT UP Example Field connections for this example are illustrated in the EHC202 wiring diagrams 1– 4 in this section. The maximum allowable Vref value is 30 Vdc. Input pulse on-off threshold levels for the 5 ... 24 Vdc Vref range are listed in the module specification table. The minimum differential input is 1.8 V. The following user logic: z z z z z Configures the module to count up from zero.
PAGE 355
Intelligent/Special Purpose Load Values The following table shows the load values.
PAGE 356
Intelligent/Special Purpose Read Input Counter Command The following table shows the read input registers. 40301 0300 40302 0000 40303 0000 40304 0000 40305 0000 40306 0000 READ INPUT COUNTER command Not used by this command When this command is issued, the content of the input pulse counter is retrieved. The 3X register content would appear as shown in the following table.
PAGE 357
Intelligent/Special Purpose User Logic The User Logic illustrated accomplishes the module’s configuration and then causes the input counter to be displayed after the first three successive scans by the PLC when it is in RUN mode. The following figure shows the module’s configuration in RUN mode.
PAGE 358
Intelligent/Special Purpose COUNT DOWN Example The COUNT DOWN example uses the same wiring as in the count up example, except the Input 1B+ level is changed to common (connected to Vref-) for Pulse Inputs illustrated in Wiring Diagrams 1 and 2. For Quadrature Inputs, no wiring change is required as the count direction is decoded internally by sensing the phase shift change between inputs A and B. The User Logic is the same as for the count example.
PAGE 359
Intelligent/Special Purpose Load Values The following table shows the load values. 400201 0243 LOAD VALUES command, disable Counter 2, preset and enable Counter 1 400202 XXXX Counter 1 Rate Sample Time in milliseconds 400203 0000 400204 0000 400205 0000 400206 0000 Counter 2 Rate Sample Time in milliseconds (Not used in this example) Not used by this command Note: Command echoes are the same as described in the Pulse Input Count Up/ Down examples.
PAGE 360
Intelligent/Special Purpose Response to Read Rate Sample Command Rate Sample Mode Caution The following table shows the responses to the read rate sample command. Register Value Description 300001 0400 Command echo 300002 XXXX Counter 1 Input rate low word 300003 XXXX Counter 1 Input rate high word: this register is a multiplier. As an example: 30002 has a value of 324 and 30003 a value of 3.
PAGE 361
Intelligent/Special Purpose Users are cautioned that beginning with V2.00 modules, if a quadrature type encoder is used to provide count input and Pulse/Quadrature Input Counter 1 and 2, bits 9 or 10, are set to 1, the module will detect all edges. The result is four times the rate sample value as would be accumulated with an equivalent pulse encoder input. In the example in the above paragraph, the rate sample would be equal to 240.
PAGE 362
Intelligent/Special Purpose Wiring Diagram 1 The following figure shows the EHC20200 wiring diagram 1. ....
PAGE 363
Intelligent/Special Purpose Note: Notes on Wiring Diagram 1. 1. Single ended pulse input. 2. Constant enable. 3. Count up. 4. Outputs 1A and 1B operate relays. 5. Counter 2 not used. 6. N/C = Not Connected. 363 35013379 02 October 2007 This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., Inc. 800-473-9123 www.barr-thorp.
PAGE 364
Intelligent/Special Purpose Wiring Diagram 2 The following figure shows the EHC20200 wiring diagram 2. Z INPUT 1AINPUT 1B- 2 1 4 3 6 5 OUTPUT RESET 10- 8 7 N/C 10 9 12 11 14 13 16 15 18 17 20 19 22 21 24 23 26 25 28 27 30 29 32 31 34 33 36 35 38 37 40 39 PRESET 1C- ENABLE 1N/C OUTPUT 1A LO FILTER SEL 1 N/C PRESET 2COUTPUT RESET 20N/C ENABLE 2N/C OUTPUT 2A LO FILTER SEL 2 A+ A- INPUT B1+ 1.
PAGE 365
Intelligent/Special Purpose Note: Notes on Wiring Diagram 2 1. Differential pulse input. 2. Constant enable. 3. Zero pulse resets outputs 1A and 1B. 4. Count up. 5. Outputs a and B operate relays. 6. Counter 2 not used. 7. N/C = Not Connected. 365 35013379 02 October 2007 This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., Inc. 800-473-9123 www.barr-thorp.
PAGE 366
Intelligent/Special Purpose Wiring Diagram 3 The following figure shows the EHC20200 wiring diagram 3.
PAGE 367
Intelligent/Special Purpose Note: Notes on Wiring Diagram 3 1. Quadrature input. 2. Constant enable. 3. Outputs 1A and 1B operate relays. 4. Counter 2 not used 5. N/C = Not Connected. 367 35013379 02 October 2007 This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., Inc. 800-473-9123 www.barr-thorp.
PAGE 368
Intelligent/Special Purpose Wiring Diagram 4 INPUT 1A- The following figure shows the EHC20200 wiring diagram 4.
PAGE 369
Intelligent/Special Purpose Note: Notes on Diagram 4. z Differential quadrature input. z Constant enable. z Zero pulse reset Output 1A and 1B. z Output 1A and 1B operate relays. z Counter 2 not used. z N/C = Not Connected. 369 35013379 02 October 2007 This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., Inc. 800-473-9123 www.barr-thorp.
PAGE 370
Intelligent/Special Purpose Module Zoom Selections Push to display and select applicable parameters. The following figure shows the module zoom selections. Counter X mode control: Incremental Quadrature Number of counters, output assertion: 2x16 w/ Output 2x32 w/ Output 2x32 No Output Rate Sample Mode Comm lost output assert override: Off On Counter X output mode Output Coil X mode: Note: When OFF, outputs are disabled when communication with the bus is lost.
PAGE 371
Intelligent/Special Purpose *Refer to Load Values Command section for the maximum values that may be used by the module. The next lines apply ONLY IF the counter is in 1x32, Output Assert Mode: Counter 2 Maximum Count: * 0 DEC Counter 2 Setpoint (alarm): * 0 DEC Time Output On: 0 DEC milliseconds (16383 maximum) *Refer to Load Values Command section for the maximum values that may be used by the module. The following figure shows the number of counters in output assertion.
PAGE 372
Intelligent/Special Purpose 140EHC20200 High Speed Counter Module Overview The EHC20200 offers the following features: z Two counters that operate in pulse or quadrature mode and accept single- ended or differential inputs. z Two FET output switches for each counter — turned on when the counter reaches programmed setpoint or maximum values, and turned off by changes in counter values, software commands, or a hard wired reset from the field. Refer to I/O Configuration for 140EHC20200, p.
PAGE 373
Intelligent/Special Purpose Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the EHC20200 High Speed Counter module. Specifications Number of Channels 2 with 2 outputs each LEDs Active F 8 Input Status LEDs (Green) 4 Output Status LEDs (Green) Count Frequency 500 kHz max with differential inputs. 250 kHz max with single-ended inputs.
PAGE 374
Intelligent/Special Purpose Specifications Fault Detection Power Dissipation Blown fuse detect, loss of outputs 1A, 1B, 2A, 2B field power 4.0 W + 0.4 x total module load current Bus Current Required 650 mA External 24 Vdc Power Supply 19.2 ... 30 Vdc, 24 Vdc nominal, 50 mA required, plus the load current for each output Fusing Internal: 2.5 A fuse, (Part # 043503948 or equivalent) External: User discretion Compatibility Programming Software: Modsoft V2.32 or Concept 2.
PAGE 375
Intelligent/Special Purpose Fuse Location The following figure shows the fuse location. 140 HEC 202 00 10 80 vdc out Fuse Location X Note: Turn off power to the module and remove the field wiring terminal strip to gain access to the fuse. 375 35013379 02 October 2007 This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., Inc. 800-473-9123 www.barr-thorp.
PAGE 376
Intelligent/Special Purpose LED Indicators and Descriptions The following figure shows the LED indicators for the EHC20200 High Speed Counter module. Active F In 1 In 2 En 1 En 2 Pre C1 Pre C2 Res 01 Res 02 Out 1A Out 2A Out 1B Out 2B The following table shows the LED descriptions for the EHC20200 high speed counter.
PAGE 377
Intelligent/Special Purpose Controlling the Module Hardware inputs from the field can be used to: z z z Increment/decrement the input counters with serial pulses from encoders or other square wave sources. Set direction of count. Reset the outputs. Hardware inputs from the field and software commands are used together to: z Enable the count input. Hardware inputs from the field or software commands can be used to: z Preset the input counter to zero or maximum count.
PAGE 378
Intelligent/Special Purpose Timing Diagrams and Parameters This section includes timing diagrams and parameters for the 140EHC20200 counter modules. Timing diagrams and a timing parameter table for the 140EHC20200 counter module are shown below. EHC20200 Timing Diagrams Tpw 1 Count Input Thold Tst Enable Tpw 2 Tst Tpw 1 Tst Preset Reset Tdly1 Tdly2 Output Assertion The following table shows the EHC20200 timing parameters.
PAGE 379
Intelligent/Special Purpose Module Functions COUNT UP The following functions apply to the EHC202 high speed counter module. The input counter is reset to zero if the count direction input is UP and a preset (hardware or software) or Load Value command is sent to the module. When counting in the UP direction, the input counter increments to the maximum value, the next input pulse sets the counter to zero and it continues counting back up to the maximum value.
PAGE 380
Intelligent/Special Purpose Miscellaneous Information Field wire to Counter 2 inputs and outputs, when configured for one 32 bit counter with output assertion. The unused Counter 1 must have its + (plus) inputs connected to VREF+. Input counts and parameters are not maintained in the module at power down. The rewrite of parameters at power up must be done with either user logic or Modzoomtype preset panel selections.
PAGE 381
Intelligent/Special Purpose Counter Rollover Examples for Pulse Input Example 1 - Count Up Pulse Input Input Counter Output A Output B Count is from 0 -> 10 (Maximum Count) Output A turns on at Setpoint = 5 Output B turns on after Input Count = Maximum (Terminal) Count = 10 Example 2 - Count Down Pulse Input Input Counter Output A Output B Count is from 10 (Maximum Count) -> 0 Output A turns on at Setpoint = 5 Output B turns on after Input Count = 0 Note: Outputs are not latched.
PAGE 382
Intelligent/Special Purpose Counter Rollover Examples for Quadrature Input Example 1 - Count Up Input A Input B Input Counter Output A Output B Count is from 0 -> 10 (Maximum Count) Output A turns on at Setpoint = 5. Output B turns on after Input Count = Maximum (Terminal) Count = 10 382 35013379 02 October 2007 This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., Inc. 800-473-9123 www.barr-thorp.
PAGE 383
Intelligent/Special Purpose Example 2 - Count Down Input A Input B Input Counter Output A Output B Count is from 10 (Maximum Count) -> 0 Output A turns on at Setpoint = 5 Output B turns on after Input Count = 0 Note: Outputs are not latched. 383 35013379 02 October 2007 This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., Inc. 800-473-9123 www.barr-thorp.
PAGE 384
Intelligent/Special Purpose Wiring Diagram Signal Descriptions Parameter INPUT A The following table shows the wiring diagram for signal descriptions. Description/Usage Single ended or differential count input or Phase A for quadrature mode. Single ended (active low only) uses Input 1A+ and/or Input 2A+. Input 1A- and/or Input 2A- are not connected. Differential input encoders use both plus (+) and minus (-) inputs. INPUT B Direction level for non-quadrature devices or Phase B for quadrature mode.
PAGE 385
Intelligent/Special Purpose Wiring Diagram The following figure shows the 140EHC20200 wiring diagram. ......
PAGE 386
Intelligent/Special Purpose The preceding wiring diagram shows single ended connections for: Terminal 1 Pulse encoder input (sinking device) Terminal 3 Input 1B count UP direction Terminal 5 Unused hardwire Preset tied high Terminal 7 Output Reset tied high, not required; outputs not used Terminal 11 Hardware enabled (software enable also required using predefined Modzoom or 4X register Terminal 17 Required Vref+ connection Terminal 21 Terminal 23 Terminal 25 Terminal 27 Terminal 31 Terminal 37
PAGE 387
Intelligent/Special Purpose 140ESI06210 ASCII Interface Module Overview The ASCII Interface Two Channel module is a Quantum communications interface module used to: z z z Input messages and/or data from an ASCII device to the CPU. Output messages and/or data from the CPU to an ASCII device. Bi-directionally exchange messages and/or data between an ASCII device and the CPU.
PAGE 388
Intelligent/Special Purpose Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the ASCII interface two channel module. Specifications Data Interface RS-232C Cabling (Maximum cable length 20 m shielded) 2 serial ports (9-pin D-shell), non-isolated 990NAA26320, Modbus Programming Cable, RS-232, 12 ft. (2.7 m) 990NAA26350, Modbus Programming Cable, RS-232, 50 ft. (15.5 m) Firmware Specifications Port Performance Burst Speed: 19.2 k baud each port.
PAGE 389
Intelligent/Special Purpose LED Indicators and Descriptions The following figure shows the ESI06210 LED indicators. R Active F Error 1 Rx1 Tx1 Error 2 Rx2 Tx2 Status The following table shows the ESI06210 LED descriptions.
PAGE 390
Intelligent/Special Purpose Status LED Crash Codes The following table shows a table of Status LED crash codes.
PAGE 391
Intelligent/Special Purpose RS-232C Serial Ports The following table shows the pin number and description for the RS-232C serial ports.
PAGE 392
Intelligent/Special Purpose Serial Port Setup When programming mode is entered, one of the RS-232 serial ports is set to a standard terminal communication’s configuration to communicate with the user on the programming terminal via a Modbus. This communication configuration consists of the following.
PAGE 393
Intelligent/Special Purpose 140HLI34000 High Speed Interrupt Module Overview The High Speed Latch and Interrupt 24 Vdc 16x1 Sink/Source Input module accepts 24 Vdc inputs and is for use with 24 Vdc sink/source input devices. Related Documentation For more detailed information on the use of a Quantum High Speed Interrupt module, refer to the Quantum Automation Series 140HLI34000 High Speed Interrupt I/O Module User Guide, part number 840USE11200.
PAGE 394
Intelligent/Special Purpose Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the HLI34000 high speed interrupt module. Specifications Number of Input Points LEDs 16 isolated points Active 1 ... 16 (Green) - Indicates point status Required Addressing 1 Word In Operating Voltages and Currents ON (voltage) 15 ... 30 Vdc OFF (voltage) -3 ... +5 Vdc ON (current) 2.0 ... 8.0 mA OFF (current) 0 ... 0.
PAGE 395
Intelligent/Special Purpose LED Indicators and Descriptions The following figure shows the LED indicators for the HLI34000 high speed interrupt module. ACTIVE 1 9 2 10 3 11 4 12 5 13 6 14 7 15 8 16 The following table shows the LED descriptions for the HLI34000 high speed interrupt module LED Descriptions LEDs Color Indication when On Active Green Bus communication is present. 1 ... 16 Green The indicated point or channel is turned on.
PAGE 396
Intelligent/Special Purpose Wiring Diagram The following figure shows the wiring diagram for the HLI 340 00 High Speed Interrupt module.
PAGE 397
Intelligent/Special Purpose Note: 1. Either shielded or unshielded signal cables may be used (the user should consider using shielded wire in a noisy environment). Shielded types should have a shield tied to earth ground near the signal source end. 2. N / C = Not Connected 397 35013379 02 October 2007 This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., Inc. 800-473-9123 www.barr-thorp.
PAGE 398
Intelligent/Special Purpose 140MSB/MSC10100 Quantum MSX Motion Modules Overview The Quantum single axis motion (MSX) modules are incremental encoder (140MSB10100) or resolver and encoder (140MSB/MSC10100) feedback-only modules contained in a single-width housing. It works with servo motors that use Cyberline drives and other types of DC and brushless drives from other manufacturers.
PAGE 399
Intelligent/Special Purpose Operational Specifications The following table shows the operational specifications for the servo. Servo Commutation Update Rate 0.25 ms Velocity Loop Update Rate 0.5 ms Velocity Loop Bandwidth > 100 Hz Velocity Range 0 - 6000 rpm Position Loop Update rate Position Accuracy - Resolver Position Repeatability - Resolver Position Accuracy - Encoder 1 ms +/- 10 arc minutes typical, +/- 15 arc minutes max +/- 5 arc minutes max Encoder dependent, 0.
PAGE 400
Intelligent/Special Purpose The following table shows the operational specifications for high speed input. High Speed Input 250 μs max Position Capture Time Isolation 500 V to system bus Pulse Width 25 μs Minimum Time Between Successive Captures 20 ms The following table shows the operational specifications for discrete inputs. Discrete Inputs Number 7 Scan Time 1.5 ms Isolation 500 V to system bus The following table shows the operational specifications for discrete outputs.
PAGE 401
Intelligent/Special Purpose The following table shows the operational specifications for analog output. Analog Output Number 1 Scan Time 20 ms Data User configurable Range +/- 10 V Accuracy +/- 50 mV, plus offset The following table shows the operational specifications for the resolver feedback (fully configured version).
PAGE 402
Intelligent/Special Purpose Electrical Specifications The following table shows the electrical specifications for discrete inputs and high speed input. Discrete Inputs and High Speed Input Input Impedance 3.5 kΩ Inputs On 15 Vdc min Inputs Off 5 Vdc max Isolation 500 Vac to system bus The following table shows the electrical specifications for discrete output. Discrete Output Drive Capability 150 mA at user supplied. 19.2 ...
PAGE 403
Intelligent/Special Purpose The following table shows the electrical specifications for the motor temperature input. Motor Temperature Input Normal State Short circuit, 2 mA sink max Fault State Open circuit Isolation 500 Vac to system bus The following table shows the electrical specifications for the encoder feedback interface. Encoder Feedback Interface Input Range -0.7 ...
PAGE 404
Intelligent/Special Purpose Front Panel Indicators and Descriptions There are 17 LED indicators visible on the front panel. The following figure shows the front panel LED indicators. Active Ready + Lim ok - Lim ok Drv Flt Drv En Out 1 Home In 4 Out 2 Out 3 In 5 In 6 In 7 Modbus Moving In Pos The following table shows the 140MSX10100 LED descriptions. Front Panel Connectors LEDs Color Indication when On Active Green Bus communication is present.
PAGE 405
Intelligent/Special Purpose Modbus Connectors The MSX modules are equipped with a 9-pin, RS-232C connector that supports Modicon’s proprietary Modbus communication protocol. The following is the Modbus port pinout connections for 9-pin and 25-pin connections. The following figure shows the MSX Modbus port pinouts to 9-pin connectors (AS-W956-xxx).
PAGE 406
17 16 15 14 13 12 11 Encoder 2 Phase A+ Encoder 1 MarkEncoder 1 Mark+ Encoder 1 Phase BEncoder 1 Phase B+ Encoder 1 Phase AEncoder 1 Phase A- 10 Encoder 2 Phase A- Limit CCW (Auxiliary Input 2) Limit CW (Auxiliary Input 1) Overtemp Low Overtemp High 43 42 Drive Enable Contact (NC) Drive Enable Contact (NO) Drive Fault Velocity - / Phase Common N/C / Phase C N/C / Phase B Velocity + / Phase A 41 26 25 24 23 406 This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., Inc.
PAGE 407
Intelligent/Special Purpose Rear Panel Switches The MSX has an RS-232 serial port to connect the module to an IBM PC (or compatible) running the Modicon Motion Development Software (MMDS). A twoposition Dip switch is located on the rear panel of the module (see the following illustration). SW1 is used to specify the module’s operating mode (984 or MMDS control). SW2 is used to specify the communication characteristics of the Modbus port upon power-up.
PAGE 408
Intelligent/Special Purpose 140XBE10000 Backplane Expander and Cable Backplane Expander With the 140XBE10000 Backplane Expander you can add a second backplane to a local or remote drop. A custom communications cable, 3.0 meters maximum, provides the data communication transfer. Backplane Expander Illustration The following figure shows the components of the backplane expander.
PAGE 409
Intelligent/Special Purpose Specifications Specifications for the 140XBE10000 Backplane Expander are below. Specifications Number of Connected Backplanes 2 Maximum Distance 3 meters Backplane Requirements Size All backplane sizes – 3, 4, 6, 10 and 16 slot. Slots used 1 Number of Backplane Expander modules allowed 1 per backplane LEDs None. Required Addressing The Backplane Expander will look like an unfilled slot in the PLC I/O map. Power Requirements Power Consumption 2.
PAGE 410
Intelligent/Special Purpose Cable Specifications Basic Configuration Specifications for the the three possible Expander Cables are below. Part Number Length 140 XCA 71703 1 meter 140 XCA 71706 2 meters 140 XCA 71709 3 meters The backplane containing the the CPU or RIO drop adapter is designated the ‘Primary’ backplane and the adjacent backplane is designated the ‘Secondary’ backplane. Each backplane requires its own power supply.
PAGE 411
Intelligent/Special Purpose CAUTION POSSIBLE COMMUNICATIONS CABLE FAILURE Do not Hot Swap a Backplane Expander module into a powered backplane unless the communications cable has first been connected to the module. Failure to follow this instruction can result in injury or equipment damage. CAUTION POSSIBLE COMMUNICATIONS FAILURE The cable is polarized. Ensure that the cable end marked "Primary" is connected to the backplane that has the CPU or RIO adapter.
PAGE 412
Intelligent/Special Purpose Backplane Expander Guidelines z z z z z z z z z z z The same 140XBE10000 Backplane Expander modules are used for the primary and secondary backplanes. The end of the Backplane Expander cable marked "Primary" always connects to the Backplane Expander module in the Primary Backplane. The system can use any Quantum type power supply. Each backplane can have a different type of power supply. Loss of power in the secondary backplane will not shut down the entire drop.
PAGE 413
Intelligent/Special Purpose 140CHS11000 Hot Standby Module Overview This section describes the Hot Standby Module 140CHS11000. The Quantum Hot Standby system is designed for use with remote I/O networks when downtime cannot be tolerated. Related Documentation For more detailed information on the use of the Hot Standby module, refer to the Quantum Automation Hot Standby System Planning and Installation Guide, part number 840USE10600.
PAGE 414
Intelligent/Special Purpose Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the Quantum Hot Standby system. Specifications I/O Type Quantum Fiber Optic Communication Ports 2 (Transmit and Receive) Compatibility Programming Software Modsoft V2.32 or Concept 2.0 at a minimum Quantum Controllers All, V2.0 at a minimum. (Check the version label of the top front of the module for the proper revision level.
PAGE 415
Intelligent/Special Purpose Error Codes The following table shows the number of times the Com Act LED blinks for each type of error and the codes possible for that group (all codes are in hex).
PAGE 416
Intelligent/Special Purpose A/B Designation Slide Switch The slide switch is used to designate the controller as A or B. The slide switch on one Hot Standby module in every pair must be set to A; the switch on the other must be set to B. The controller designated A will begin as the primary controller as long as it reaches the ready state before or at the same time as controller B. If the switches are set to the same position, the system will refuse to recognize the second controller at startup.
PAGE 417
Quantum Intrinsically Safe Analog/Digital, Input/Output Modules 15 At a Glance Introduction This chapter provides information on the Intrinsically Safe Analog Input/Output, and Digital Input/Output Modules. What's in this Chapter? This chapter contains the following sections: Section Topic 15.1 Intrinsically Safe Modules - General Information Page 418 15.2 Intrinsically Safe Analog Modules 422 15.
PAGE 418
Intrinsically Safe Modules 15.1 Intrinsically Safe Modules - General Information Intrinsically Safe Modules – General Description Introduction The following information is specifically concerned with the application of intrinsic safety with regards to the installation and field wiring of the Quantum Intrinsically Safe series of modules.
PAGE 419
Intrinsically Safe Modules Hot Swapping Hot swapping Quantum Intrinsically Safe modules is not allowed per intrinsic safety standards. WARNING HOT SWAPPING RESTRICTION Do not attempt to hot swap a Quantum Intrinsically Safe module. Failure to follow this instruction can result in death, serious injury, or equip- ment damage.
PAGE 420
Intrinsically Safe Modules Module Figure The following diagram is a view of a typical input or output module.
PAGE 421
Intrinsically Safe Modules Intrinsically Safe Wiring Diagram The following diagram illustrates a Quantum Intrinsically Safe module using a separate raceway to isolate its external wiring to the hazardous area. This is just one of the possible ways of field wiring the module.
PAGE 422
Intrinsically Safe Modules 15.2 Intrinsically Safe Analog Modules At a Glance Overview This section provides information on the intrinsically safe analog modules, 140AII33000, 140AII33010, and 140AIO33000.
PAGE 423
Intrinsically Safe Modules I/O Configuration for Intrinsically Safe Analog Modules Overview This section provides information on the I/O configuration of the intrinsically safe analog modules, 140AII33000, 140AII33010, and 140AIO33000. 140AII33000 The following information pertains to configuration of the 140AII33000 intrinsically safe analog input module. I/O Map register Assignment Register assignments depend on module configuration.
PAGE 424
Intrinsically Safe Modules RTD I/O Map Register Assignments When the 140AII33000 is configured as a RTD/Resistance input module, it requires nine contiguous input (3x) registers assigned as follows.
PAGE 425
Intrinsically Safe Modules Thermocouple/ Millivolt Map Register Assignments When the 140AII33000 is configured as a Thermocouple/Millivolt input module, it requires ten contiguous input (3x) registers assigned as follows.
PAGE 426
Intrinsically Safe Modules I/O Map Status Byte The I/O map status byte is used by the 140AII33000 module as follows.
PAGE 427
Intrinsically Safe Modules Configure each channel (1 through 8) appropriate to the module input type selected. For RTD Module Input: Channel Enable/Disable: Enable Disable 4-Wire /3-Wire /2-Wire: 4 Wire RTD Type (Pt, Ni, R, A Pt) 3 Wire 2 Wire Pt100, -200 to 850 Pt200, -200 to 850 Pt500, -200 to 850 Pt1000, -200 to 850 Ni 100, -60 to 180 Ni 200, -60 to 180 Ni 500, -60 to 180 Ni1000, -60 to 180 R, 0 to 766.
PAGE 428
Intrinsically Safe Modules I/O Map Register Assignments The 140AII33010 module requires nine contiguous input (3x) registers assigned as follows. Register 1 Channel 1 data Register 2 Channel 2 data Register 3 Channel 3 data Register 4 Channel 4 data Register 5 Channel 5 data Register 6 Channel 6 data Register 7 Channel 7 data Register 8 Channel 8 data Register 9 1 2 3 4 Input Status Word 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 = Broken Wire (4 ...
PAGE 429
Intrinsically Safe Modules 140AIO33000 The following information pertains to configuration of the 140AIO33000 intrinsic safe analog output module.
PAGE 430
Intrinsically Safe Modules Modsoft Module Zoom Selections Use Modsoft’s Module Zoom feature to display and select the module channel ranges and time-out state. Time-out state is assumed when system control of the module is stopped. The following figure shows the time-out state for the Modsoft module zoom feature.
PAGE 431
Intrinsically Safe Modules 140AII33000 Intrinsically Safe Analog Input Module Overview The Quantum 140AII33000 Intrinsically Safe Analog Input module will interface with eight intrinsically safe analog inputs, which are software-configurable on a module basis with either RTD/Resistance or thermocouple/millivolt inputs. When it is configured as an RTD/Resistance Input module, it supports 100Ω, 200Ω, 500Ω, and 1000Ω platinum (American or European) and nickel sensors.
PAGE 432
Intrinsically Safe Modules RTD/Resistance Module Specifications Specifications for the Quantum140AII33000 module configured as an Intrinsically Safe RTD/Resistance input module are as follows. RTD/Resistance Module Specifications Number of Channels LEDs 8 Active (Green) F (Red) 1 - 8 (Red) Indicated channel is out of range - includes broken wire and short circuit conditions.
PAGE 433
Intrinsically Safe Modules Thermocouple/ Millivolt Module Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the Thermocouple/Millivolt module. Thermocouple/Millivolt Module Specifications Number of Channels LEDs 8 Active (Green) F (Red) 1 ... 8 (Red). Indicated channel is out of range - Broken wire condition is detected. TC Types and Ranges Types J K E T S R B Ranges (°C) -210 ... +760 -270 ... +1370 -270 ... +1000 -270 ... +400 -50 ... +1665 -50 ... +1665 +130 ...
PAGE 434
Intrinsically Safe Modules Thermocouple/Millivolt Module Specifications Isolation Channel to Channel Channel to Bus None 1780 Vac @ 47-63 Hz or 2500 Vdc for 1 min. Update Time 1 sec. (all channels) Fault Detection Out of range or broken wire Bus Current Required Power Dissipation 400 mA 2W External Power Not required for this module Hot Swap Not allowed per intrinsic safety standards Fusing Internal - not user accessible Programming Software Modsoft Ver. 2.6 or higher or Concept Ver. 2.
PAGE 435
Intrinsically Safe Modules Terminal Strip Color and Keying Assignment The module’s 140XTS33200 field wiring terminal strip is color-coded blue to identify it as an intrinsically safe connector. The terminal strip is keyed to prevent the wrong connector from being applied to the module. The keying assignment is given below.
PAGE 436
Intrinsically Safe Modules Agency Approved Wiring Diagrams The following is a Cenelec certified wiring diagram for this module configured with an RTD/Resistance connection. CENELEC CERTIFICATION Entity Parameters per Channel: Vo = 15.5 Vdc Io = 276 mA/ch Po = 1.07 W/ch Co = 0.
PAGE 437
Intrinsically Safe Modules The following is a Cenelec certified wiring diagram for this module when configured with a Thermocouple connection. CENELEC CERTIFICATION Entity Parameters per Channel: Vo = 15.5 Vdc Io = 276 mA/ch Po = 1.07 W/ch C0 = 0.
PAGE 438
Intrinsically Safe Modules The following is a CSA certified wiring diagram for this module when configured with an RTD/resistor connection. Note 1. Entity parameters per channel: Voc = 15.5 V Isc = 123 mA Ca = 0.47 uf La = 1.0 mH Note 2. Maximum nonhazardous area voltage must not exceed 250 V. Note 3. Install in accordance with Canadian Electrical Code, Part I for installation in Canada. Note 4. Install in accordance with the NEC (ANSI/NFPA 70) and ANSI/ISA RP 12.6 for installation in the United States.
PAGE 439
Intrinsically Safe Modules The following is a CSA certified wiring diagram for this module when configured with a thermocouple connection. Notes related to CSA certification for this module. Note 1. Entity parameters per channel: Voc = 15.5 V Isc= 123 mA Ca = 0.47 μf La = 1.0 mH Note 2. Maximum nonhazardous area voltage must not exceed 250 V. Note 3. Install in accordance with Canadian Electrical Code, Part I for installation in Note 4. Install in accordance with the NEC (ANSI/NFPA 70) and ANSI/ISA RP 12.
PAGE 440
Intrinsically Safe Modules The following is a FM certified wiring diagram for this module when configured as a RTD/resistor connection. 440 35013379 02 October 2007 This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., Inc. 800-473-9123 www.barr-thorp.
PAGE 441
Intrinsically Safe Modules Notes Related to FM Certification This IS field device should meet Note 5 or should be FM approved with entity concept in Note 4 appropriate for connection with RTD/TC IN Module with Concept Parameters listed below. The entity parameters are per Channel. Voc = 15.5 VDC Isc = 276 mA/Ch Ca = 500 nf/Ch La = 0.
PAGE 442
Intrinsically Safe Modules The following is a FM certified wiring diagram for this module when configured with a thermocouple connection. 442 35013379 02 October 2007 This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., Inc. 800-473-9123 www.barr-thorp.
PAGE 443
Intrinsically Safe Modules Notes Related to FM Certification This IS field device should meet Note 5 or should be FM approved with entity concept in Note 4 appropriate for connection with IS RTD/TC IN Module with Concept Parameters listed below. The entity parameters are per Channel. Voc = 15.5 VDC Isc = 276 mA/Ch Ca = 500 nf/Ch La = 0.
PAGE 444
Intrinsically Safe Modules The following is a UL certified wiring diagram for this module when configured with an RTD/resistor connection. Notes related to UL certification for this module. Note 1. Entity parameters per channel: Voc = 15.5 V Isc = 123 mA Ca = 0.47 uf La = 466 uH Note 2. Maximum nonhazardous area voltage must not exceed 250 V. (SEE NOTE 1) I Source 1 (+) I Source 1 (-) V Sense 1 (+) V Sense 1 (-) N/C I Source 2 (-) Note 3.
PAGE 445
Intrinsically Safe Modules The following is a UL certified wiring diagram for this module when configured with a thermocouple connection. Notes related to UL certification for this module. HAZARDOUS LOCATION CLASS 1, DIVISION 1 GROUP A, B, C, D NON-HAZARDOUS LOCATION Note 1. Entity parameters per channel: Voc = 15.5 V Isc = 123 mA Ca = 0.47 uf La = 466 μH Note 2. Maximum nonhazardous area voltage must not exceed 250 V. Note 3.
PAGE 446
Intrinsically Safe Modules 140AII33010 Intrinsically Safe Current Input Module Overview The Quantum 140AII33010 Intrinsically Safe Current Input module interfaces with eight intrinsically safe analog inputs which are software-configurable. The module accepts 0 ... 20 mA, 0 ... 25 mA, and 4 ... 20 mA inputs. The module allows any mix and match of current input ranges that can be configured by the software. The module provides power to intrinsically safe transmitters located in hazardous areas.
PAGE 447
Intrinsically Safe Modules Specifications Channel to Bus 1780 Vac @ 47-63 Hz or 2500 Vdc for 1 min. Update Time 750 ms for all channels Fault Detection Broken wire (4 ... 20 mA mode) Bus Current Required 1.5 A Power Dissipation 7.5 W External Power Not required Hot Swap Not allowed per intrinsic safety standards Fusing Internal-not user accessible Programming Software Modsoft Ver. 2.61 or higher Field Wiring Field wiring to the module consists of separate shielded, twisted pair wires.
PAGE 448
Intrinsically Safe Modules Agency Approved Wiring Diagrams The following is a Cenelec certified wiring diagram for this module. CENELEC CERTIFICATION Entity Parameters per Channel: Vo = 23.8 Vdc Io = 112 mA/ch Po = 622 mW/ch Co = 127 nf/ch Lo = 2.
PAGE 449
Intrinsically Safe Modules The following is a CSA certified wiring diagram for this module. Notes related to CSA certification for this module. Note 1. Entity parameters per channel: Voc = 23.8 V Isc = 112 mA Ca = 127nf NON-HAZARDOUS LOCATION (SEE NOTE 1) V1 (-) (See Note 2) N/C Note 2. Maximum nonhazardous area voltage must not exceed 250 V. Note 3. Install in accordance with Canadian Electrical Code, Part I for installation in Canada. Note 4.
PAGE 450
Intrinsically Safe Modules The following is a FM certified wiring diagram for this module. Notes Related to FM Certification This IS field device should meet note 6 or should be FM approved with entity concept in Note 5 appropriate for connection with IS Analog Current IN Module with Concept Parameters listed below. The entity parameters are per channel. Voc = 23.8 VDC Isc = 112 mA/Ch Ca = 127 nf/CH La = 2.
PAGE 451
Intrinsically Safe Modules The following is a UL certified wiring diagram for this module. Notes related to UL certification for this module. HAZARDOUS LOCATION CLASS I, DIVISION I GROUP A, B, C, D NON-HAZARDOUS LOCATION Note 1. Entity parameters per channel: Vcc = 24.3 V Isc = 112 mA Ca = 127 nf La = 1.5 mH (SEE NOTE 1) V1 (-) (See Note 2) Note 2. Maximum nonhazardous area voltage must not exceed 250 V. Note 3.
PAGE 452
Intrinsically Safe Modules 140AIO33000 Intrinsically Safe Analog Output Module Overview The Quantum 140AIO33000 Intrinsically Safe Analog Output module controls and monitors current loops in intrinsically safe applications. The module provides 8 dualended output channels that are referenced over sense resistors to a single Common. The output ranges are 4 ... 20 mA, 0 ... 20 mA, and 0 ... 25 mA.
PAGE 453
Intrinsically Safe Modules Specifications Specifications for the Quantum 140AIO33000 Intrinsically Safe Analog Output module are as follows. Specifications Number of Channels 8 LEDs Active (Green) F (Red) 1 ... 8 (Green) - Module output switched ON 1 ... 8 (Red) - Broken wire on indicated Channel (4 ... 20 mArange) Loop Resistance Ranges 500 ohms maximum 4 ... 20 mA (0 to 4095) 4 ... 20 mA (0 to 16000) 0 ... 20 mA (0 to 20000) 0 ...
PAGE 454
Intrinsically Safe Modules Field Wiring Field wiring to the module should consist of separate shielded, twisted pair wires. The acceptable field wire gauge should be AWG 30 to AWG 18. Wiring between the module and the intrinsically safe field device should follow intrinsically safe wiring practices to avoid the transfer of unsafe levels of energy to the hazardous area.
PAGE 455
Intrinsically Safe Modules Agency Approved Wiring Diagrams The following is a CSA certified wiring diagram for this module. Notes related to CSA certification for this module. Note 1. Entity parameters per channel: Vcc = 29.42 V Isc = 93 mA Ca = 71 nf La = 2.0 mH Note 2. Maximum nonhazardous area voltage must not exceed 250 V. Note 3. Install in accordance with Canadian Electrical Code, Part I for installation in Canada. Note 4. Install in accordance with the NEC (ANSI/NFPA 70) and ANSI/ISA RP 12.
PAGE 456
Intrinsically Safe Modules The following is a FM certified wiring diagram for this module. Notes Related to FM Certification This IS field device should meet Note 7 or should be FM approved with entity concept in Note 6 appropriate for connection with IS RTD/TC IN Module with concept parameters listed below. The entity parameters listed are per channel. Voc = 29.5 VDC Isc = 94 mA/Ch Ca = 68 nf/Ch La = 4.
PAGE 457
Intrinsically Safe Modules The following is a UL certified wiring diagram for this module. Notes related to UL certification for this module. Note 1. Entity parameters per channel: Vcc = 29.5 V Isc = 93 mA Ca = 68 nf La = 2.0 mH Note 2. Maximum nonhazardous area voltage must not exceed 250 V. Note 3. If the electrical parameter of the cable are unknown, the following values must be used for Ccable and Lcable: Capacitance 60 Pf/ft Inductance 0.20 uH/ft Note 4.
PAGE 458
Intrinsically Safe Modules The following is a Cenelec certified wiring diagram for this module. CENELEC CERTIFICATION Entity Parameters per channel: Vo = 29.5 Vdc Io = 94 mA/Ch Po = 520 mW/ch Co = 68 nf/ch Lo = 4.2 mH/ch HAZARDOUS LOCATION CLASS 1, DIVISION 1 GROUP A, B, C, D NON-HAZARDOUS LOCATION (SEE NOTE 1) Output 1 (-) N/C Output 2 (-) N/C Monitor 1 (-) I.S.
PAGE 459
Intrinsically Safe Modules 15.3 Intrinsically Safe Discrete Modules At a Glance Overview This section provides information on the intrinsically safe discrete modules, 140DII33000 and 140DIO33000.
PAGE 460
Intrinsically Safe Modules I/O Configuration for Intrinsically Safe Discrete Modules Overview Intrinsically Safe Discrete Input Module I/O Map Register Assignment This section provides information on the I/O configuration of the intrinsically safe discrete modules, 140DII33000 and 140DIO33000.
PAGE 461
Intrinsically Safe Modules Intrinsically Safe Discrete Output Module The following shows the 8-point discrete output module: I/O Map Register Assignment The ouput modules listed above can be configured as either eight contiguous discrete output (0x) references or as one output (4x) register. The following figure shows the format for the output modules. z 140DIO33000 (DC, Intrinsic Safe 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 I/O Map Status Byte There is no I/O Map status byte associated with this module.
PAGE 462
Intrinsically Safe Modules 140DII33000 Intrinsically Safe Discrete Input Module Overview The Quantum 140DII33000 Intrinsically Safe Discrete Input module provides safe power to dry contact closures e.g., push buttons, selector switches, float switches, flow switches, limit switches, etc., in a hazardous area, and receives the proportional current to indicate an on/off state. The received current is converted into digital signals that is transferred to the PLC.
PAGE 463
Intrinsically Safe Modules Fixed Wiring System The DII33000module is designed with a fixed wiring system where the field connections are made to a 40-pin, fixed position, blue terminal strip which is plugged into the module. Field Wiring Field wiring to the module consists of separate shielded twisted pair wires. The acceptable field wire gauge is AWG 20 to AWG 12.
PAGE 464
Intrinsically Safe Modules Agency Approved Wiring Diagrams The following is a Cenelec certified wiring diagram for this module. CENELEC CERTIFICATION Entity Parameters per Channel: Vo = 9.6 Vdc Io = 80 mA/ch Po = 192 mW/ch Co = 450 nf/ch Lo = 694 microH/ch Input 1 (+) N/C Input 2 (+) N/C Input 3 (+) N/C Input 4 (+) NON-HAZARDOUS LOCATION (SEE NOTE 1) I.S.
PAGE 465
Intrinsically Safe Modules The following is a CSA certified wiring diagram for this module. Notes related to CSA certification for this module. Note 1. Entity parameters per module: Voc = 9.6 V Isc = 80 mA Ca = 450 nf La = 694 mH NON-HAZARDOUS LOCATION (See Note 1) I.S. +8 Vdc Input 1 (+) N/C N/C Input 2 (+) Note 3. Install in accordance with Canadian Electrical Code, Part I, for installation in Canada. Input 3 (+) Input 3 (-) N/C Input 4 (+) N/C Input 4 (-) Note 5.
PAGE 466
Intrinsically Safe Modules The following is a FM certified wiring diagram for this module. Notes Related to FM Certification This IS field device should meet Note 5 or should be FM approved or connection with IS RTD/TC IN Modules with Concept Parameters listed below. The entity parameters are per Channel. Voc = 9.6 VDC Isc = 80 mA/Module Ca = 450 nf/Ch La = 0.
PAGE 467
Intrinsically Safe Modules The following is a UL certified wiring diagram for this module. Notes related to UL certification for this module. HAZARDOUS LOCATION CLASS 1, DIVISION 1 GROUP A, B, C, D NON-HAZARDOUS LOCATION Note 1. Entity parameters per channel: Voc = 9.5 V Isc = 80 mA Ca = 450 nf La = 0.175 mH Note 2. Maximum nonhazardous area voltage must not exceed 250 V. Note 3.
PAGE 468
Intrinsically Safe Modules 140DIO33000 Intrinsically Safe Discrete Output Module Overview The Quantum 140DIO33000 Intrinsically Safe Discrete Output module switches intrinsically safe power to a variety of components such as solenoid valves, LEDs, etc., that are located in a hazardous area. This module is for use with sink devices only. Specifications Specifications for the DIO33000 module are as follows. Specifications Number of Output Points LEDs Output Voltage 8 Active-1 (Green) 1 ...
PAGE 469
Intrinsically Safe Modules Field Wiring Field wiring to the module consists of separate shielded, twisted pair wires. The acceptable field wire gauge is AWG 20 to AWG 12. Wiring between the module and the intrinsically safe field device should follow intrinsically safe wiring practices, to avoid the transfer of unsafe levels of energy to the hazardous area.
PAGE 470
Intrinsically Safe Modules Agency Approved Wiring Diagrams The following is a Cenelec certified wiring diagram for this module. CENELEC CERTIFICATION Entity Parameters per Channel: Vo = 27.9 Vdc Io = 121 mA/ch Po = 840 mW/ch Co = 84 nf/ch Lo = 2.2 mH/ch Output 1 (+) N/C Output 2 (+) N/C Output 3 (+) N/C Output 4 (+) (See Notes 1 & 2) I.S.
PAGE 471
Intrinsically Safe Modules The following is a CSA certified wiring diagram for this module. Notes related to CSA certification for this module. Note 1. Entity parameters per channel: Voc = 27.9 V Isc = 119 mA Ca = 84 nf La = 1.0 mH Note 2. Maximum nonhazardous area voltage must not exceed 250 V. Note 3. Install in accordance with Canadian Electrical Code, Part I, for installation in Canada. NON-HAZARDOUS LOCATION I.S.
PAGE 472
Intrinsically Safe Modules The following is a FM certified wiring diagram for this module. Notes Related to FM Certification This IS field device should meet Note 5 or should be FM approved with entity concept in Note 4 appropriate for connection with IS RTD/TC IN Module with Concept Parameters LIsted below. The entity parameters are per Channel. Voc = 27.9 VDC Isc = 121 mA/Ch Ca = 84 nf/Ch La = 2.
PAGE 473
Intrinsically Safe Modules The following is a UL certified wiring diagram for this module. Notes related to UL certification for this module. Note 1. Entity parameters per channel: Voc = 27.9 V Isc = 119 mA Ca = 84 nf La = 1.0 mH Note 2. Maximum nonhazardous area voltage must not exceed 250 V. NON-HAZARDOUS LOCATION I.S. +24 Vdc @ NO LOAD Output 1 (+) Output 1(-) N/C Output 2 (+) Output 2 (-) N/C Output 3 (+) Note 3.
PAGE 474
Intrinsically Safe Modules 474 35013379 02 October 2007 This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., Inc. 800-473-9123 www.barr-thorp.
PAGE 475
Quantum Simulator Modules 16 At a Glance Introduction This chapter provides information on discrete and analog simulator modules. What's in this Chapter? This chapter contains the following topics: Topic Page 140XSM00200 Quantum Point Discrete Simulator Module 476 140XSM01000 Analog Simulator Module 478 475 35013379 02 October 2007 This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., Inc. 800-473-9123 www.barr-thorp.
PAGE 476
Simulator Modules 140XSM00200 Quantum Point Discrete Simulator Module Overview The 140XSM00200 module consists of 16 toggle switches which are used to generate up to 16 binary input signals to the 140DAI54000 and the 140DAI74000 AC input modules. CAUTION ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD When using this simulator module with the 140DAI54000 or 140DAI74000 input modules, you should be careful not to come in contact with the supplied 115 or 230 VAC located at the bottom of the simulator module.
PAGE 477
Simulator Modules 16 Point Discrete Simulator Module The following figure shows the 140XSM00200 16 Point Discrete Simulator module. X 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 140 XSM 002 00 Discrete Input Simulator 2 3 (For use with 140DAO54000 & 140DAO74000) 1 Switch Position Function Right Middle Left Momentary Signal Off Constant Signal 14 15 16 X Power Connector N L Power Connector Label Note: Voltage source range is 24 ... 230 Vac.
PAGE 478
Simulator Modules 140XSM01000 Analog Simulator Module Overview The 140XSM010module is used for simulating 4 ... 20 mA field current loops used with current input Quantum modules. It provides two adjustable 4 ... 20 mA analog signals and one fixed 24 Vdc output. The simulator also measures and displays voltages from 0 ... 5 Vdc. The simulator module includes the following: z An internal 24 Vdc power supply z A 0 ...
PAGE 479
Simulator Modules Analog Simulator Module The following figure shows the XSM01000 Analog Simulator module. 140 XSM 010 00 Analog simulator Removable Door X Voltmeter X Analog out Potentiometers Analog in1 Analog in2 X Color Coded Leads Note: The 140XSM01000 can be placed in any slot in the Quantum. Note: The 140XSM01000 is not a functional module and should be used only for testing, simulating, and calibrating current input Quantum modules.
PAGE 480
Simulator Modules Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the XSM 010 00 analog simulator module. Specifications Voltage Operating Voltage 100 ... 240 Vac, 50/60 Hz Output Continuous 24 Vdc, 400 mA max Operating Current 300 mA @ 120 Vac Voltmeter Range 0 ... 5 Vdc 10-Turn Potentiometer Output Variable Current/Voltage 4 ... 20 mA 1 ... 5 Vdc Internal Fusing None Bus Current Required None 480 35013379 02 October 2007 This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co.
PAGE 481
Simulator Modules Wiring Diagram The following figure shows the 140XSM01000 generic wiring diagram for the 140Axl03000 input modules, 140Ax002000 output modules, and the 140AMM09000 input/output module. Wiring Example Analog Simulator 140XSM01000 Analog Output Red V + Black – White 0-5 Vdc 1 Monitor 2 (Typical) 7 9 Blue 10 249 Ohms (Load for illustration purposes) Analog Input Yellow IN 1 1 2 Input X (Typical) 3 Violet 5 6 Input Y (Typical) 7 IN 2 – + 24 Vdc L N Black White 115...
PAGE 482
Simulator Modules Note: The preceding diagram shows a typical connection between the simulator, a 140ACI03000 input module, and a 140ACO02000 output module. The simulator provides a variable 4 ... 20 mA input to the analog in module. The input can then be read by a Quantum CPU, and, if required, outputted through an analog out module.
PAGE 483
Quantum Battery Module 17 At a Glance Overview The following chapter provides information on the battery module, its installations and replacement considerations. What's in this Chapter? This chapter contains the following topics: Topic Page I/O Configuration for the 140XCP90000 Battery Module 484 140XCP90000 Quantum Battery Module 485 483 35013379 02 October 2007 This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., Inc. 800-473-9123 www.barr-thorp.
PAGE 484
Battery Module I/O Configuration for the 140XCP90000 Battery Module Overview The following provides information on the Battery module, 140XCP90000 (Battery Backup). I/O Map Register Assignment There is no I/O Map register assignment associated with this module. I/O Map Status Byte The two least significant bits in the I/O Map status byte are used as follows: 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Bat1 Low Bat2 Low Module Zoom Selections There are no Module Zoom selections required for this module.
PAGE 485
Battery Module 140XCP90000 Quantum Battery Module Overview This section describes the battery module, its installation and replacement considerations. Battery Module The following figure shows the battery module components.
PAGE 486
Battery Module Battery Backup The 140XCP90000 provides RAM backup power for expert modules. One nonrechargeable 3.6 V lithium battery is provided and is accessible from the front of the module in Battery Slot 1 (the upper slot) for easy removal when it is necessary to change it. Note: Extended backup protection is provided when a second battery is installed in Battery Slot 2 (the lower slot). Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the battery module.
PAGE 487
Battery Module LED Indicators and Descriptions The following figure shows the LED indicators. Active Bat1 Low Bat2 Low The following table shows the LED descriptions. LED Descriptions LEDs Color Indication when On Active Green Bus communication is present. Bat1 Low Red Battery 1 voltage is low. Bat2 Low Red Battery 2 voltage is low. Note: The Bat1 Low and Bat2 Low LEDs turn ON when a battery is not installed, installed backwards, or in need of replacement.
PAGE 488
Battery Module Installing/ Removing a Battery The following procedure describes how to install or remove a battery. Step Action 1 Remove the insulating strip from the new battery. 2 If necessary, remove the old battery. Detach it from its housing (on the front of the module), by pulling the battery access strip (see below) until the battery pops out. Insulating Strip Battery CAUTION Pull on this tape to remove battery. Do not use metallic tool. Batt.
PAGE 489
Quantum I/O Modules 18 At a Glance Introduction The following section provides information on the Quantum Input/Output (I/O) modules. What's in this Chapter? This chapter contains the following sections: Section 18.1 Topic Page Overview of I/O Modules 490 18.2 Analog Input Modules 506 18.3 Analog Output Modules 545 18.4 Analog Input/Output Modules 562 18.5 Discrete Input Modules 574 18.6 Discrete Output Modules 632 18.7 Discrete Verified Output Module 700 18.
PAGE 490
I/O Modules 18.1 Overview of I/O Modules At a Glance Overview This section provides an overview of I/O modules used in Quantum. What's in this Section? This section contains the following topics: Topic Page Quantum I/O Modules 491 I/O Map Status Byte 504 490 35013379 02 October 2007 This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., Inc. 800-473-9123 www.barr-thorp.
PAGE 491
I/O Modules Quantum I/O Modules Overview The following section contains specifications for input/output modules. Module descriptions include wiring diagrams, LED indicators and descriptions, illustrations of module figures, and, for discrete modules, true high/true low descriptions. I/O Module The following figure shows the I/O modules and its components.
PAGE 492
I/O Modules Recommendations for Fitting Terminal Blocks to Discrete Modules Recommendations for Fitting Terminal Blocks to Analog Modules Quantum I/O LED Descriptions WARNING HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH Before mounting/removing a discrete module, z cut-off the power to the module (sensors and pre-actuators), and z disconnect the terminal block. Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.
PAGE 493
I/O Modules LED Indicators and Descriptions for Discrete 16 Point and Analog I/O Modules The following table shows the LED indicators for discrete 16 point and analog I/O modules. Active F 1 9 1 9 2 10 2 10 3 11 3 11 4 12 4 12 5 13 5 13 6 14 6 14 7 15 7 15 8 16 8 16 The following table shows the LED descriptions for discrete 16 point and analog I/O modules. LEDs Color Indication when ON Active Green Bus communication is present. F Red 1 ... 16 Green 1 ...
PAGE 494
I/O Modules LED Indicators and Descriptions for 24 Point Input Modules The following table shows the LED indicators for the 24 point input modules. Active F 1 9 17 2 10 18 3 11 19 4 12 20 5 13 21 6 14 22 7 15 23 8 16 24 The following table shows the LED descriptions for the 24 point input modules. LED Indicators and Descriptions for 32 Point I/O Modules LEDs Color Indication when ON Active Green Bus communication is present. F Red 1 ...
PAGE 495
I/O Modules LED Indicators and Descriptions for Bi-Directional Modules The following table shows the LED indicators for the 140AMM09000 bi-directional module. Active F 1 1 1 2 2 2 3 4 The following table shows the LED descriptions for the 140AMM09000 bi-directional module. LEDs Color Indication when ON Active Green Bus communication is present. F Red 1 and 2 (left column) Green 1 and 2 (middle column) Red Indicates output status: broken wire or bad field supply. 1 ...
PAGE 496
I/O Modules The following table shows the LED descriptions for the 140DAM59000 and 140DDM39000 bi-directional modules. LEDs Color Indication when ON Active Green Bus communication is present. F Red A fault (external to the module) has been detected. 1 and 8 (left columns) Green The indicated output point and channel is turned ON. 1 and 16 (right two columns) Green The indicated input point and channel is turned ON.
PAGE 497
I/O Modules LED Indicators and Descriptions for Discrete 12 Point Modules with Fault Indication The following table shows the LED indicators for the discrete 12 point 140DDO88500 module with fault indication. Active F 1 9 1 9 2 10 2 10 3 11 3 11 4 12 4 12 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 The following table shows the LED descriptions for discrete 12 point modules with fault indication. LEDs Color Indication when ON Active Green Bus communication is present. F Red 1 ... 12 Green 1 ...
PAGE 498
I/O Modules Field Wiring Terminal Strip/ Module Keying Assignments Field wiring terminal strips and module housings are slotted on the left and right sides of the PCB card slot to accept keying pins (see I/O Module figure). The purpose of keying is to prevent plugging the terminal strip into the wrong module, once wiring connections have been made. Keying is implemented at the discretion of the user.
PAGE 499
I/O Modules The following figure shows the I/O module keying assignments. Secondary Key Slots Right Side of Terminal Strip Primary Key Slots Left Side of Terminal Strip A 1 B 2 C C 3 D D 4 E 5 F A B E F 1 2 3 4 5 6 6 F E F D E C B D A C B X A Install the key into the slot round end first. Note: The primary/secondary keys shown (in black) in this example reflect the recommended coding of a 24 Vdc module in slot 6 to its field wiring terminal strip.
PAGE 500
I/O Modules I/O Module Terminal Strip Keying The following table shows the primary module and terminal strip keying for the I/O modules. Primary Module and Terminal Strip Keying Module Class 5 Vdc Module Part Number Module Coding Terminal Strip Coding 140DDI15310 ABC DEF 140DDO15310 9 ... 12 Vdc Unassigned ABD CEF 24 Vdc 140DDI35300 ABE CDF ABF CDE ACD BEF ACE BDF ACF BDE ADE BCF ADF BCE 140DDI35310 140DDM39000 140DDO35300 140DDO35310 140DSI35300 140HLI34000 10 ...
PAGE 501
I/O Modules Primary Module and Terminal Strip Keying Module Class Module Part Number Module Coding Terminal Strip Coding Relay Analog I/O 140DRC83000 AEF BCD 140ACI03000 BCD AEF BCE ADF 140AVI03000 140ACO02000 140AVO02000 BCF ADE TC/RTD 140ARI03010 BDE ACF Analog In/Out 140AMM09000 BDF ACE Intelligent/ Special Purpose 140EHC10500 BEF ACD 140ATI03000 140EHC20200 Unassigned CDE ABF Unassigned CDF ABE Unassigned CEF ABD Unassigned DEF ABC To implement the user-optiona
PAGE 502
I/O Modules Secondary Keying and Backplane Positions The following table shows the secondary keying and backplane positions. Backplane Position Module Coding Terminal Strip Coding 1 123 456 2 124 356 3 125 346 4 126 345 5 134 256 6 135 246 7 136 245 8 145 236 9 146 235 10 156 234 11 234 156 12 235 146 13 236 145 14 245 136 15 246 135 16 256 134 The user may also use personality keying to differentiate between like module types (i.e.
PAGE 503
I/O Modules Discrete I/O True High/True Low Circuit Descriptions The following figures illustrate discrete I/O module true high and true low logic circuits.
PAGE 504
I/O Modules I/O Map Status Byte Overview This Quantum I/O map menu entry allows you to assign the 3x register that defines the start of a table in which I/O-mapped module status is available. You may either enter the 3x value, or the value 0 (indicating no choice). The value entered is displayed in the summary information on the top of the Quantum I/O Map.
PAGE 505
I/O Modules Table/Module Configuration The following figure shows the table/module configuration. Slot 1 2 Slot 2 3 4 I/O A I/O B 5 6 I/O C Slot 1 300001 Slot 4 Slot 3 I/O B I/O A Slot 6 Slot 5 I/O C 300002 300003 Given the above sample configuration, if you select 300001 as the starting address of the status table and there are no I/O modules in the first two locations, the first I/O module status is found in the least significant byte of the second word (i.e., position 3).
PAGE 506
I/O Modules 18.2 Analog Input Modules At a Glance Overview This section provides information on Quantum Analog Input Modules.
PAGE 507
I/O Modules I/O Configuration for Analog Input Modules Overview This section provides information on configuration of Analog Input modules. These modules include: z z z z z 140ACI03000 140ACI03000 140ACI04000 140ARI03010 140ATI03000 140AVI03000 The following information pertains to configuration of the 140ACI03000 Analog Input module. 507 35013379 02 October 2007 This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., Inc. 800-473-9123 www.barr-thorp.
PAGE 508
I/O Modules I/O Map and Register Assignment The ACI03000 eight-channel unipolar input module requires nine contiguous input (3x) registers, assigned as follows. Register 1 Channel 1 data (0 ... 4,095 = 1 ... 5 VDC or 4 ... 20 mA) Register 2 Channel 2 data (0 ... 4,095 = 1 ... 5 VDC or 4 ... 20 mA) Register 3 Channel 3 data (0 ... 4,095 = 1 ... 5 VDC or 4 ... 20 mA) Register 4 Channel 4 data (0 ... 4,095 = 1 ... 5 VDC or 4 ... 20 mA) Register 5 Channel 5 data (0 ... 4,095 = 1 ... 5 VDC or 4 ...
PAGE 509
I/O Modules WARNING Possible Equipment Failure When configured for voltage measurement (no jumper installed between INPUT(+) and I SENSE terminals), if a broken field wire occurs, readings will be non-zero and not predictable. Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage. I/O Map Status Byte The most significant bit in the I/O map status byte is used for the 140ACI03000 Input module.The following figure shows the MSB register.
PAGE 510
I/O Modules I/O Map Register Assignment This module requires 17 contiguous input (3x) registers which are assigned as follows: Register 1 Channel 1 data Register 2 Channel 2 data Register 3 Channel 3 data Registers 4 ... 13 Register 14 Channel 14 data Register 15 Channel 15 data Register 16 Channel 16 data 510 35013379 02 October 2007 This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., Inc. 800-473-9123 www.barr-thorp.
PAGE 511
I/O Modules I/O Map Register AssignmentsRegister 17 The following figure shows the status warnings for register 17. Register 17 Input Status Word 1 = Broken wire (4 ... 20 mA only) on channel 16 1 = Broken wire (4 ... 20 mA only) on channel 15 1 = Broken wire (4 ... 20 mA only) on channel 14 1 = Broken wire (4 ... 20 mA only) on channel 13 1 = Broken wire (4 ... 20 mA only) on channel 12 1 = Broken wire (4 ... 20 mA only) on channel 11 1 = Broken wire (4 ...
PAGE 512
I/O Modules I/O Map Register Assignment This module requires nine contiguous 16-bit (3x) registers—eight for input data and one for input status.
PAGE 513
I/O Modules Note: The data format is 16-bit integer values in the positive range and an integer value with the MSB indicating a negative sign in the negative range. *A range warning is issued when a channel input exceeds the rated input value. An out-of-range bit is set when a channel input exceeds the rated input value by 2.34% or when a broken wire is sensed on the channel. The warning bit is cleared when the out-of-range bit is set.
PAGE 514
I/O Modules The following figure shows the channel X configuration selection. Channel Enable/Disable: ENABLE DISABLE 4-Wire/3-Wire/2-Wire: 4 WIRE 3 WIRE 2-WIRE RTD TYPE (Pt, Ni, R, A Pt): 140ATI03000 Pt100, -200 ...850 Pt200, -200 ...850 Pt500, -200 ...850 Pt1000, -200 ...850 Ni100, -60 ... 180 Ni200, -60 ... 180 Ni500, -60 ... 180 Ni1000, -60 ... 180 R, 0 ... 766.66 OHM R, 0 ... 4000 OHM APt100, -100 ... 450 APt200, -100 ... 450 APt500, -100 ... 450 APt1000, -100 ...
PAGE 515
I/O Modules I/O Map Register Assignments This module requires ten contiguous, 16-bit words—eight for input data, one for channel status, and one for internal temperature of the module. The data words formats are as follows. Word 1 Channel 1 data Word 2 Channel 2 data Word 3 Channel 3 data Word 4 Channel 4 data Word 5 Channel 5 data Word 6 Channel 6 data Word 7 Channel 7 data Word 8 Channel 8 data 515 35013379 02 October 2007 This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., Inc.
PAGE 516
I/O Modules The following shows the word 9 register.
PAGE 517
I/O Modules Measurement Ranges Ranges in the following table are expressed in degrees C. The user can select either 0.1 or 1.0° (C or F) for the output data format. If the 0.1° format is selected, the decimal point is implied (i.e., a reading of 1234 should be interpreted as 123.4°). The internal CJC data is reported in the same units as the TC output. All TC output data is in signed integer format except as noted for Type B (see below).
PAGE 518
I/O Modules Note: 1. Open Circuit Detect is always enabled for all TC types and may be disabled for linear ranges. 2. On millivolt ranges, if Open Circuit Detect is enabled, this bit is set on Open Circuit Detect or input FFFFh 3. Data format changes to unsigned if the output is requested in units of 0.1° F to accommodate readings above 3276.8° F. 518 35013379 02 October 2007 This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., Inc. 800-473-9123 www.barr-thorp.
PAGE 519
I/O Modules Module Zoom Selections Push to display and select the configuration parameters. 1.0 DEG Resolution: 0.
PAGE 520
I/O Modules 140AVI03000 The following information pertains to configuration of the 140AVI03000 Analog Input module. I/O Map Register Assignments This module requires nine contiguous input (3x) registers. Map Register Assignment The following figures shows the assignment registers and the input status warnings.
PAGE 521
I/O Modules The following figure shows Register 9.
PAGE 522
I/O Modules Linear Measuring Ranges The following table shows the linear measuring ranges for the 140AVI03000 Analog Input module. Data Format Input Under Warning Normal Over Warning 16-bit Format +/- 10 V < 768 768 ... 64,768 > 64,768 +/- 5 V, +/- 20 mA <16,768 16,768 ... 48,768 > 48,768 0 ... 10 V 0 ... 64,000 > 64,000 0 ... 5 V, 0 ... 20 mA 0 ... 32,000 > 32,000 1 ... 5 V, 4 ... 20 mA <6,400 6,400 ... 32,000 > 32,000 +/- 10 V < –10,000 –10,000 ...
PAGE 523
I/O Modules Module Zoom Selections Push to display and select data format for the module and the ranges for the individual input channels. The following figures show the module data format and Channel X range (per channel) options.
PAGE 524
I/O Modules 140ACI03000 I/O Analog In Module Overview The Analog Input 8 Channel Unipolar module accepts mixed current and voltage inputs. Required jumpers between the input and sense terminals for current input measuring are included with the module. Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the ACI03000 analog input module. Specifications Number of Channels LEDs 8 Differential Active: Indicates bus communication present. F: Indicates channel fault.
PAGE 525
I/O Modules Specifications Channel to Channel Update Time Fault Detection 30 Vdc max 5 ms for all channels Broken wire (4 ... 20 mA mode) or under voltage range (1 ... 5 V) Bus Current Required 240 mA Power Dissipation External Power 2W Not required for this module Note: Calibration is not required for this module. 525 35013379 02 October 2007 This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., Inc. 800-473-9123 www.barr-thorp.
PAGE 526
I/O Modules Wiring Diagram The following figure shows the wiring diagram for the ACI030 module.
PAGE 527
I/O Modules Note: 1. The current and voltage sources are supplied by the user (fusing is at the discretion of the user). 2. Either a shielded or unshielded signal cable may be used. Shielded types should have a shield tied to earth ground near the signal source end. 3. Unused inputs may cause the activation of the F LED. To avoid this occurrence, wire unused channels in voltage mode to a channel that is in use. 4. N / C = Not connected.
PAGE 528
I/O Modules 140ACI04000 High Density Analog in I/O Module Overview The 140ACI04000 is a 16 channel analog input module which accepts mixed current inputs. 528 35013379 02 October 2007 This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., Inc. 800-473-9123 www.barr-thorp.
PAGE 529
I/O Modules Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the ACI04000 analog input module. Specifications Number of Channels LEDs 16 Differential or 16 externally tied single ended Active: Indicates Bus communication is present F: Indicates channel fault. NOTE: This module produces a fault signal F if any one channel detects a broken wire condition in the 4 ... 20 mA range. Required Addressing 17 Words In Current Input Linear Measuring Range 0 ... 25 mA, 0 ... 25,000 counts 0 ...
PAGE 530
I/O Modules Wiring Diagram Wiring diagram for the 140ACI04000 module.
PAGE 531
I/O Modules Note: 1. The current sources are supplied by the user (fusing is at the discretion of the user.) 2. Either shielded or unshielded cables may be used. In noisy environments, twisted shielded cable is recommended. Shielded cable should have a shield tied to earth ground near the signal source end. 3. Unused inputs may cause the activation of the F LED. To avoid this occurrence the unused channels should be configured in the 0 ... 25 mA range. 4.
PAGE 532
I/O Modules 140ARI03010 I/O RTD Input 8 Channel Module Overview The RTD Input 8 Channel module accepts input from up to eight 2-, 3-, and 4-wire RTD sensors, and provides temperature measurement data to the Quantum CPU. Specifications The following table shows the ARI030010 RTD IN specifications. Specifications Number of Channels 8 LEDs Active F 1 ... 8 (Red) - Indicated channel is out of range. (This includes broken wire and short circuit conditions.
PAGE 533
I/O Modules Specifications 3-wire Fault Detection 1.2 s Out of range or 8 red LEDs to indicate broken wire conditions Bus Current Required 200 mA Power Dissipation External Power 1W Not required for this module 533 35013379 02 October 2007 This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., Inc. 800-473-9123 www.barr-thorp.
PAGE 534
I/O Modules Wiring Diagram Figure The following figure shows the ARI03010 wiring diagram.
PAGE 535
I/O Modules Note: 1. The module is calibrated per: IEC Publication 751 for platinum RTDs: 100Ω @ 0 degrees C, TCR (α) = 0.00385Ω/Ω/degrees C. DIN 43760 for nickel RTDs American Platinum RTDs: 100Ω @ 0 degrees C, TCR (α) = 0.00392Ω/Ω/ degrees C 2. Terminals labeled shield are not connected internally. Shields should be grounded at the field device end. 3. When using 2-wire configurations, the temperature equivalent of twice the lead resistance of one leg must be subtracted from the temperature reading.
PAGE 536
I/O Modules 140ATI03000 I/O Thermocouple Input 8 Channel Module Overview The Thermocouple Input 8 Channel is an eight-channel thermocouple input module. Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the TC IN module. Specifications Number of Channels 8 LEDs Active F 1 ... 8 (Red) - Indicated channel is out of range - or Broken wire condition is detected Required Addressing 10 Words In TC Types and Ranges Range (degrees C) J - 210 ... + 760 K - 270 ... + 1370 E - 270 ...
PAGE 537
I/O Modules Specifications TC Ranges Millivolt Ranges Choice of: 1.0° C (default) 0.1° C 1.0° F 0.1° F 100 mV range, 3.05 mV (16 bits) 25 mV range, 0.76 mV (16 bits) TC Absolute Accuracy (see Note 1) Types J, K, E, T (see Note 2) +/- 2° C plus +/- 0.1% of reading Types S, R, B (see Note 3) +/- 4° C plus +/- 0.1% of reading Millivolt Absolute Accuracy @ 25° C Accuracy Drift w /Temperature +/- 20 μV plus +/- 0.1% of reading 0.15 μV / °C plus 0.
PAGE 538
I/O Modules Wiring Diagram The following figure shows the ATI03000 wiring diagram.
PAGE 539
I/O Modules Note: 1. Either shielded or unshielded TCs may be used. (The user should consider using shielded wire in a noisy environment.) Shielded types should have a shield tied to earth ground near the signal source end. 2. Connections marked Not Used are not electrically connected within the module. These points are used as a thermal link to ambient air. They are not recommended as electrical tie points as this could affect the accuracy of cold junction compensation.
PAGE 540
I/O Modules 140AVI03000 I/O Analog IN 8 Channel Bipolar Module Overview The Analog In 8 Channel Bipolar module accepts a mix of current and voltage inputs. Jumpers are required between the input and sense terminals for current inputs. Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the AVI03000 ANALOG IN module. Specifications Number of Channels LEDs 8 Differential Active F 1 ... 8 (Red) – Indicated channel is out of range or broken wire condition is detected (4 ...
PAGE 541
I/O Modules Specifications Common Mode Rejection > -80 dB @ 60Hz Input Filter Single pole low pass, -3dB cutoff @ 847Hz, +/- 20% Isolation Channel to Bus 750 Vdc, 500 Vac rms, for 1 minute Channel to Channel 200 Vdc, 135 Vac rms max Update Time 10 ms for all channels Fault Detection Broken wire in 4 ... 20 mA mode, out of range in 1 ... 5 V mode Bus Current Required 280 mA Power Dissipation 2.
PAGE 542
I/O Modules Data Format Input Range Under Warning Normal Over Warning 12-bit Format +/- 10 V 0 0 ... 4,095 4,095 +/- 5 V, +/- 20 mA 0 0 ... 4,095 4,095 0 ... 4,095 4,095 0 ... 4,095 4,095 0 ... 4,095 4,095 0 ... 10 V 0 ... 5 V, 0 ... 20 mA 1 ... 5 V, 4 ... 20 mA 0 *The Voltmeter ranges are listed in signed integer format. 542 35013379 02 October 2007 This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., Inc. 800-473-9123 www.barr-thorp.
PAGE 543
I/O Modules Wiring Diagram The following figure shows the AVI03000 wiring diagram.
PAGE 544
I/O Modules Note: 1. The current and voltage sources are supplied by the user (fusing is at the discretion of the user). 2. Either shielded or unshielded signal cables may be used. Shielded types should have a shield tied to earth ground near the signal source end. 3. To prevent improper fault indications, unused inputs should have the + (plus) and – (minus) inputs tied together and be configured for a bipolar input range. 4. N / C = Not Connected.
PAGE 545
I/O Modules 18.3 Analog Output Modules At a Glance Overview This section provides information on Quantum analog output modules. What's in this Section? This section contains the following topics: Topic Page I/O Configuration for Analog Output Modules 546 140ACO02000 Quantum I/O Analog Current Out Module 550 140ACO13000 High Density Analog Out I/O Module 554 140AVO02000 Quantum I/O Analog Voltage Out Module 558 545 35013379 02 October 2007 This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co.
PAGE 546
I/O Modules I/O Configuration for Analog Output Modules Overview This section provides information on the configuration of analog output modules. These modules are: z z z z 140ACO02000 140ACO13000 140AIO33000 140AVO02000 140ACO02000 The following information pertains to configuration of the 140ACO02000 Analog Output module. I/O Map Register Assignment This module requires four contiguous output (4x) registers, which are assigned as follows. The following figure shows the register assignments.
PAGE 547
I/O Modules Modsoft Module Zoom Selections Push to display and select the timeout states for each channel. Timeout state is assumed when system control of the module is stopped. Disabled Channel X Timeout State (per channel) Last Value User Defined Channel X User Defined Timeout Value: 140ACO13000 0 DEC The following information pertains to configuration of the 140ACO13000 analog current sink output module.
PAGE 548
I/O Modules I/O Map Status Byte The I/O map status is used for the 140ACO13000 output module as follows: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Channel 1 loop broken wire Channel 2 loop broken wire Channel 3 loop broken wire Channel 4 loop broken wire Channel 5 loop broken wire Channel 6 loop broken wire Channel 7 loop broken wire Channel 8 loop broken wire Modsoft Module Zoom Selections Push to display and select channel ranges and timeout states for each channel.
PAGE 549
I/O Modules I/O Map Register Assignment This module requires four contiguous output (4x) registers, which are assigned as follows . Register 1 Channel 1 data (0 ... 4,095 +/- 10 V, +/- 5 V, 0 ... 5 V, or 0 ... 10 V) Register 2 Channel 2 data (0 ... 4,095 +/- 10 V, +/- 5 V, 0 ... 5 V, or 0 ... 10 V) Register 3 Channel 3 data (0 ... 4,095 +/- 10 V, +/- 5 V, 0 ... 5 V, or 0 ... 10 V) Register 4 Channel 4 data (0 ... 4,095 +/- 10 V, +/- 5 V, 0 ... 5 V, or 0 ...
PAGE 550
I/O Modules 140ACO02000 Quantum I/O Analog Current Out Module Overview The Analog Output 4 Channel Current module controls and monitors current in 4 ... 20 mA loops. Specifications The following table shows the module specifications. Specifications Number of Channels 4 LEDs Active F 1 ... 4 (Green) - Module outputs switched on 1 ... 4 (Red) - Broken wire on indicated channels NOTE: When the green channel status LEDs are off, the loop current is 0 mA.
PAGE 551
I/O Modules Specifications Update Time 3 ms for all channels (simultaneous update) Settling Time 900 μs to +/- 0.1% of the final value Fault Detection Open circuit in 4 ... 20 mA mode. Specific channel is identified when an open circuit is detected through the red channel LED. Bus Current Required 480 mA Power Dissipation 5.3 W max External Power Supply See Loop Voltage in this table. Fusing Internal None WARNING Possible injury to personnel or equipment.
PAGE 552
I/O Modules ACO02000 Wiring Diagram The following figure shows the wiring diagram for the 140ACO02000 module.
PAGE 553
I/O Modules Note: 1. Unused channels will indicate broken wire status unless wired to the loop supply, as shown on Channel 4. In this example, loop supply must be 30 V or less. 2. VM is an optional voltmeter that can be connected to read voltage that is proportional to the current. Wiring to this terminal is limited to 1 meter maximum. 3. The wiring example shows Channel 1 acting as a current sink and Channel 2 acting as a current source for their respective field devices. 4. N / C = Not Connected.
PAGE 554
I/O Modules 140ACO13000 High Density Analog Out I/O Module Overview The 140ACO13000 is an eight channel analog output module used to control and monitor current in 4 ... 20 mA, 0 ... 20 mA, and 0 ... 25 mA loops. Specifications The following table shows the technical specifications for the ACO13000 module. Specifications Number of Channels LEDs 8 Active, indicates bus communication present F, indicates a fault on a channel 1 ... 8 (Green) - Module outputs active 1 ...
PAGE 555
I/O Modules Specifications Internal External None None Voltmeter Monitor Scaling Accuracy @ 25° C VOUT (Volts) = ILOOP (mA) x 0.10 +/- 0.2% of full scale 300 Ω Output Impedance Maximum Cable Length 1 meter Programming Software Modsoft Ver 2.6 or Concept 2.2 555 35013379 02 October 2007 This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., Inc. 800-473-9123 www.barr-thorp.
PAGE 556
I/O Modules Wiring Diagram 140ACO130 Wiring Diagram VM Field Device Field Device Field Device Field Device Field Device Field Device Field Device Field Device + – 24 Vdc loop supply RETURN 2 1 MONITOR 1 OUTPUT 1 SINK 4 3 N/C RETURN 6 5 MONITOR 2 OUTPUT 2 SINK 8 7 N/C N/C 10 9 N/C RETURN 12 11 MONITOR 3 OUTPUT 3 SINK 14 13 N/C RETURN 16 15 OUTPUT 4 SINK 18 17 N/C N/C 20 19 N/C RETURN 22 21 MONITOR 5 OUTPUT 5 SINK 24 23 N/C RETURN 26 25 MONITOR 6
PAGE 557
I/O Modules Notes on Wiring Diagram 1. At power up, channel outputs are all at zero current (0 mA). 2. VM is an optional voltmeter that can be connected to read voltage that is proportional to the current. Wiring to this terminal is limited to 1 meter maximum. 3. Either shielded or unshielded cables may be used. In noisy environments, twisted shielded cable is recommended. Shielded cable should have a shield tied to earth ground near the signal source end. 4.
PAGE 558
I/O Modules 140AVO02000 Quantum I/O Analog Voltage Out Module Overview The Analog Out 4 Channel module outputs voltages in mixed modes and levels. These are selected using jumpers on the field-wiring connector. Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the AVO02000 Analog Out 4 channel module. Specifications Number of Channels 4 LEDs Active 1 ...
PAGE 559
I/O Modules Specifications Channel to Bus Maximum Settling Time Update Time Fault Detection Wire Length Bus Current Required Power Dissipation External Power 1780 Vac @ 47 ... 63 Hz for 1 minute 700 μs to +/- 0.1% of the final value 3 ms for all channels None 400 m max 700 mA 4.5 W max Not required for this module Fusing Internal None External An external fuse is required on the master override signal when it is connected to an external source. The required fuse is 1/16 A or 0.063 A fuse.
PAGE 560
I/O Modules During normal operation, the front panel Active and 1 ... 4 green LEDs are ON. If bus communication to the module stops for any reason, the Active LED will go off and, depending on panel software configuration: z z when LEDs 1 ... 4 are ON, the channel output levels will be as predetermined and held by the module. when LEDs 1 ... 4 are OFF, the master override levels are output on each channel. If module power is lost or the module fails, the master override levels will be output.
PAGE 561
I/O Modules Wiring Diagram The following figure shows the wiring diagram for the 140AVO02000 module.
PAGE 562
I/O Modules 18.4 Analog Input/Output Modules At a Glance Overview This section provides information on Quantum Analog input/output modules. What's in this Section? This section contains the following topics: Topic Page Configuration of the 140AMM09000 Analog Input/Output Module 563 140AMM09000 Analog Input/Output Module 568 562 35013379 02 October 2007 This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., Inc. 800-473-9123 www.barr-thorp.
PAGE 563
I/O Modules Configuration of the 140AMM09000 Analog Input/Output Module Overview This section provides information on configuration of the analog input/output module 140AMM09000. Note: Modsoft V2.2 or above is required to set up your Quantum I/O configuration. I/O Map Register Assignment This module requires five contiguous input (3x) registers and two output (4x) registers. 3X Registers The following figure shows the 3x registers.
PAGE 564
I/O Modules Status Warning The following figure shows the status warnings for register 5.
PAGE 565
I/O Modules Linear Measuring Ranges The following table shows the linear measuring ranges for the 140AMM09000 combination Analog module. Data Format Input Under Warning Normal Over Warning 16-bit Format +/- 10 V < 768 768 ... 64,768 > 64,768 +/- 5 V, +/- 20 mA < 16,768 16,768 ... 48,768 > 48,768 0 ... 64,000 > 64,000 0 ... 10 V 0 ... 5 V, 0 ... 20 mA 0 ... 32,000 > 32,000 1 ... 5 V, 4 ... 20 mA < 6,400 6,400 ... 32,000 > 32,000 +/- 10 V < -10,000 -10,000 ...
PAGE 566
I/O Modules I/O Map Status Byte The I/O map status byte is used for the 140AMM09000 Combination module as follows.
PAGE 567
I/O Modules Module Zoom Selections (Outputs) Push to display and select the mode for the outputs after a communication’s timeout. This mode is selected for each channel. The following figure shows the module zoom selections (outputs). Not Installed Channel X Output State: Last Value Not installed = Disabled with output current equal to 0 for all conditions. No error generated for this channel.
PAGE 568
I/O Modules 140AMM09000 Analog Input/Output Module Overview The Analog In/Out 4/2 bi-directional module combines four analog inputs which accept a mix of current and voltage, with two isolated analog outputs that control and monitor current in 4 ... 20 mA loops. Topology Specifications The following table shows the topology specifications for the analog input/output module.
PAGE 569
I/O Modules Input Specifications The following table shows the input specifications for the analog input/output module. Input Specifications Operating Ranges Bipolar +/- 10 Vdc +/-5 Vdc +/- 20 mA Unipolar 0 ... 10 Vdc 0 ... 5 Vdc 0 ... 20 mA Unipolar w/Offset 1 ... 5 Vdc 4 ... 20 mA Voltage Input Linear Measuring Range 2.4% over and under range Absolute Maximum Input +/- 50 Vdc Input Impedance In Range >10 MΩ Input Impedance Over Range > 0.5 MΩ Current Input Linear Measuring Range +2.
PAGE 570
I/O Modules Output Specifications The following table shows the output specifications for the analog input/output module. Output Specifications Loop Voltage 7 ... 30 Vdc, up to 60 Vdc with an external resistor Loop Resistance V loop – 30Vdc R MIN∗ = -----------------------------------0.02A V loop – 7Vdc R MAX = --------------------------------0.02A *No RMIN is required for loop voltage less than 30 Vdc.
PAGE 571
I/O Modules Voltmeter Monitor Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the voltmeter monitor for the analog input/output module. Voltmeter Monitor Specifications Range 1 ... 5 V (Loop current must be active) Scaling IOUT (mA) x 0.250 = VOUT (volts) Output Impedance 300Ω typical Maximum Wire Length Common Specifications 1 meter The following table shows the common specifications for the analog input/output module.
PAGE 572
I/O Modules Wiring Diagram The following figure shows the wiring diagram for the 140 AMM 090 00 analog input/ output module.
PAGE 573
I/O Modules Output Section 2 Channels Typical Wiring Outputs Channel 1 The output shows a connection to an external field device and optional monitor. Channel 2 The output shows a connection to an external field device and the input of channel 1. Input Section 4 Channels Typical Wiring Inputs Channel 1 Channel 1 shows 4 - 20 mA current input controlled by output section Channel 2. Channel 4 The input shows a connection to a voltage output sensor. Note: 1. Pins 1 ... 20 are outputs Pins 21 ...
PAGE 574
I/O Modules 18.5 Discrete Input Modules At a Glance Overview This section provides information on Quantum discrete input modules.
PAGE 575
I/O Modules I/O Configuration for Discrete Input Modules Overview This section provides information on configuration of 16-, 24-, 32-, and 96-point input modules. 16-Point Input Modules The 16-point input modules are: z z z z z z I/O Map Register Assignment 140DAI34000 (AC Input 24 Vac 16x1) 140DAI44000 (AC Input 48 Vac 16x1) 140DAI54000 (AC Input 115 Vac 16x1) 140DAI54300 (AC Input 115 Vac 8x2) 140DAI74000 (AC Input 230 Vac 16x1) 140DDI84100 (DC Input 10 ...
PAGE 576
I/O Modules Register 1 Input Point 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 MSB - First Word Register 2 Input Point 17 MSB - Second Word I/O Map Status Byte There is no input I/O map status byte associated with this module. Modsoft Module Zoom Selections Push to display and select the Input Type and the Filter Select options. The following figures show the input type and the filter select option.
PAGE 577
I/O Modules I/O Map Register Assignment The input modules listed above can be configured as either 32 contiguous discrete input (1x) references or as two contiguous input (3x) registers in the following format. The following figure shows the input points for Register 1 and Register 2.
PAGE 578
I/O Modules 140DDI36400 Register Assignment The following information pertains to the 140DDI36400 Input module. The following figures show the output points for register 1 through 6.
PAGE 579
I/O Modules 140DAI34000 Quantum I/O 24 VAC IN Module Overview The AC Input 24 Vac 16x1 module accepts 24 Vac inputs. Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the DAI34000 24 VAC IN module. Specifications Number of Input Points 16 Individually Isolated LEDs Active 1 ... 16 (Green) - Indicates point status Required Addressing 1 Word In Operating Voltages and Input Currents* 50 Hz ON: 14 ... 30 Vac (11.1 mA max) OFF: 0 ... 5 Vac Typical Input Impedance 60 Hz 3.
PAGE 580
I/O Modules Specifications Internal None External User discretion Note: Input signals must be sinusoidal with less than 6% THD (Total Harmonic Distortion) and 63 Hz maximum frequency. 580 35013379 02 October 2007 This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., Inc. 800-473-9123 www.barr-thorp.
PAGE 581
I/O Modules Wiring Diagram The following figure shows the DAI34000 wiring diagram.
PAGE 582
I/O Modules 140DAI35300 Quantum I/O AC Input 24 Vac Module Overview The AC Input 24 Vac 4x8 module accepts 24 Vac inputs. Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the DAI35300 AC input 24 VAC IN module. Specifications Number of Input Points 32 in four 8 point groups LEDs Active 1 ... 32 (Green) - Indicates point status F: Indicates channel fault. Note: This module produces a fault signal F if any one channel detects a broken wire condition in the 4...20 mA range.
PAGE 583
I/O Modules Specifications Input to Bus Fault Detection 1780 Vac for 1 minute Broken wire (4...20 mA mode) or under voltage range (1...5 V) Bus Current Required 250 mA Power Dissipation External Power 10.9 W max Not required for this module Fusing Internal None External User discretion Note: Input signals must be sinusoidal with less than 6% THD and 63 Hz maximum frequency. 583 35013379 02 October 2007 This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., Inc. 800-473-9123 www.barr-thorp.
PAGE 584
I/O Modules Wiring Diagram The following figure shows the DAI35300 wiring diagram.
PAGE 585
I/O Modules 140DAI44000 Quantum I/O 48 VAC IN Module Overview The AC Input 48 Vac 16x1 module accepts 48 Vac inputs. Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the DAI44000 48 VAC IN module. Specifications Number of Input Points 16 individually isolated LEDs Active 1 ... 16 (Green) - Indicates point status Required Addressing 1 word in Operating Voltages and Input Currents* 50 Hz ON: 34 ... 56 Vac (9.8 mA max) OFF: 0 ... 10 Vac Typical Input impedance 60 Hz 6.
PAGE 586
I/O Modules Specifications Fusing Internal None External User discretion Note: Input signals must be sinusoidal with less than 6% THD and 63 Hz maximum frequency. 586 35013379 02 October 2007 This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., Inc. 800-473-9123 www.barr-thorp.
PAGE 587
I/O Modules Wiring Diagram The following figure shows the DAI44000 wiring diagram.
PAGE 588
I/O Modules 140DAI45300 Quantum I/O AC Input 48 Vac 4x8 Module Overview The AC Input 48 Vac 4x8 module accepts 48 Vac inputs. Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the DAI45300 AC input 48 VAC IN module. Specifications Number of Input Points 32 in four 8 point groups LEDs Active 1 ... 32 (Green) - Indicates point status F: Indicates channel fault. Note: This module produces a fault signal F if any one channel detects a broken wire condition in the 4...20 mA range.
PAGE 589
I/O Modules Specifications Input to Bus Fault Detection 1780 Vac for 1 minute Broken wire (4...20 mA mode) or under voltage range (1...5 V) Bus Current Required 250 mA Power Dissipation External Power 10.9 W max Not required for this module Fusing Internal None External User discretion Note: Input signals must be sinusoidal with less than 6% THD and 63 Hz maximum frequency. 589 35013379 02 October 2007 This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., Inc. 800-473-9123 www.barr-thorp.
PAGE 590
I/O Modules Wiring Diagram The following figure shows the DAI45300 wiring diagram.
PAGE 591
I/O Modules 140DAI54000 Quantum I/O 115 VAC In Module Overview The AC Input 115 Vac 16x1 module accepts 115 Vac inputs. Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the DAI54000 115 VAC IN module. Specifications Number of Input Points 16 individually isolated LEDs Active 1 ... 16 (Green) - Indicates point status Required Addressing 1 word in Operating Voltages and Input Currents* 50 Hz ON: 85 ... 132 Vac (11.1 mA max) OFF: 0 ... 20 Vac Typical Input impedance 60 Hz 14.
PAGE 592
I/O Modules Specifications Fusing Internal None External User discretion Note: Input signals must be sinusoidal with less than 6% THD and 63 Hz maximum frequency. 592 35013379 02 October 2007 This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., Inc. 800-473-9123 www.barr-thorp.
PAGE 593
I/O Modules Wiring Diagram The following figure shows the 140DAI54000 wiring diagram.
PAGE 594
I/O Modules 140DAI54300 Quantum I/O AC Input 115 Vac 2x8 Module Overview The AC Input 115 Vac 2x8 module accepts 115 Vac inputs. Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the DAI54300 AC input 115 VAC IN module. Specifications Number of Input Points 16 in two 8 point groups LEDs Active 1 ... 16 (Green) - Indicates point status Required Addressing 1 word in Operating Voltages and Input Currents* 50 Hz Typical Input Impedance 60 Hz Typical Input Impedance ON: 85 ...
PAGE 595
I/O Modules Specifications Fault Detection None Bus Current Required 180 mA Power Dissipation External Power 5.5 W max Not required for this module Fusing Internal None External User discretion Note: Input signals must be sinusoidal with less than 6% THD and 63 Hz maximum frequency. 595 35013379 02 October 2007 This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., Inc. 800-473-9123 www.barr-thorp.
PAGE 596
I/O Modules Wiring Diagram The following figure shows the DAI54300 wiring diagram.
PAGE 597
I/O Modules Note: 1. All inputs in a group must be from the same phase of line input voltage. 2. This module is not polarity sensitive. 3. N / C = Not Connected. CAUTION Voltage Compatibility All inputs in a group must be from the same phase of line input voltage. Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage. 597 35013379 02 October 2007 This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., Inc. 800-473-9123 www.barr-thorp.
PAGE 598
I/O Modules 140DAI55300 Quantum I/O AC Input 115 Vac 4x8 Module Overview The AC Input 115 Vac 4x8 module accepts 115 Vac inputs. Specifications The following table shows the technical specifications for the DAI55300 115 VAC IN module. Specifications Number of Input Points 32 in four 8 point groups LEDs Active 1 ... 32 (Green) - Indicates point status Required Addressing 2 words in Operating Voltages and Input Currents* 50 Hz Typical Input Impedance 60 Hz Typical Input Impedance ON: 85 ...
PAGE 599
I/O Modules Specifications Bus Current Required 250 mA Power Dissipation External Power 10.9 W max Not required for this module Fusing Internal None External User discretion Note: Input signals must be sinusoidal with less than 6% THD and 63 Hz maximum frequency. 599 35013379 02 October 2007 This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., Inc. 800-473-9123 www.barr-thorp.
PAGE 600
I/O Modules Wiring Diagram The following figure shows the DAI55300 wiring diagram.
PAGE 601
I/O Modules Note: 1. All inputs in a group must be from the same phase of line input voltage. 2. This module is not polarity sensitive. 3. N/C = Not Connected CAUTION Voltage Compatibility All inputs in a group must be from the same phase of line input voltage. Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage. 601 35013379 02 October 2007 This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., Inc. 800-473-9123 www.barr-thorp.
PAGE 602
I/O Modules 140DAI74000 Quantum I/O AC Input 230 Vac 16x1 Module Overview The AC Input 230 Vac 16x1 module accepts 230 Vac inputs. Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the 230 VAC IN module. Specifications Number of Input Points LEDs 16 individually isolated Active 1 - 16 (Green) - Indicates point status Required Addressing 1 word in Operating Voltages and Input Currents* 50 Hz Input Impedance 60 Hz Input Impedance ON: 175 ... 264 Vac (9.7 mA max) OFF: 0 ... 40 Vac 31.
PAGE 603
I/O Modules Specifications Internal None External User discretion Note: Input signals must be sinusoidal with less than 6% THD and 63 Hz maximum frequency. 603 35013379 02 October 2007 This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., Inc. 800-473-9123 www.barr-thorp.
PAGE 604
I/O Modules Wiring Diagram The following figure shows the DAI74000 wiring diagram.
PAGE 605
I/O Modules 140DAI75300 Quantum I/O AC Input 230 Vac 4x8 Module Overview The AC Input 230 Vac 4x8 module accepts 230 Vac inputs. Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the DAI75300 AC 230 VAC IN module. Specifications Number of Input Points LEDs 32 in four 8 point groups Active 1 - 32 (Green) - Indicates point status Required Addressing 2 words in Operating Voltages and Input Currents* 50 Hz Typical Input Impedance 60 Hz Typical Input Impedance ON: 175... 264 Vac (9.
PAGE 606
I/O Modules Specifications Fusing Internal None External User discretion Note: Input signals must be sinusoidal with less than 6% THD and 63 Hz maximum frequency. 606 35013379 02 October 2007 This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., Inc. 800-473-9123 www.barr-thorp.
PAGE 607
I/O Modules Wiring Diagram The following figure shows the DAI75300 wiring diagram.
PAGE 608
I/O Modules 140DDI15310 Quantum I/O DC Input 5 V 4x8 Source Module Overview The DC Input 5 V 4x8 Source module accepts 5 Vdc inputs. It is for use with shared input common wired to 0 V and is compatible with TTL, -LS, -S, and CMOS logic. Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the DDI15310 5 V IN module. Specifications Number of Input Points 32 in four 8 point groups LEDs Active 1 ...
PAGE 609
I/O Modules Specifications External Logic States User discretion The following table shows the logic states for the DDI15310 module. Input Voltage Input State LED <= 0.8 Vdc ON ON >= 4.0 Vdc @ 5.5 US >= 3.0 Vdc @ OFF OFF OFF OFF 4.5 US No Connection 609 35013379 02 October 2007 This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., Inc. 800-473-9123 www.barr-thorp.
PAGE 610
I/O Modules Wiring Diagram The following figure shows the DDI15310 wiring diagram.
PAGE 611
I/O Modules 140DDI35300 Quantum I/O DC Input 24 Vdc 4x8 Sink Module Overview The DC Input 24 Vdc 4x8 Sink module accepts 24 Vdc inputs and is for use with shared input common wired to positive potential. Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the DDI35300 24 VDC IN module. Specifications Number of Input Points 32 in four 8 point groups LEDs Active 1 ... 32 (Green) - Indicates point status Required Addressing 2 words in Operating Voltages and Currents ON (voltage) +15 ...
PAGE 612
I/O Modules Wiring Diagram The following figure shows the DDI35300 wiring diagram.
PAGE 613
I/O Modules Note: N / C = Not Connected 613 35013379 02 October 2007 This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., Inc. 800-473-9123 www.barr-thorp.
PAGE 614
I/O Modules 140DDI35310 Quantum I/O DC Input 24 Vdc Source 4x8 Input Module Overview The 24 Vdc Source 4x8 Input module accepts 24 Vdc inputs and is for use with shared input common wired to 0 V. Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the DDI35310 24 VDC IN SOURCE module. Specifications Number of Input Points 32 input points in four 8 point groups LEDs Active 1 ... 32 (Green) - Indicates point status Required Addressing 2 words in Voltage ON (Voltage) -15 ...
PAGE 615
I/O Modules Wiring Diagram The following figure shows the DDI35310 wiring diagram.
PAGE 616
I/O Modules 140DDI36400 I/O DC Input 24 VDC 6x16 Telefast Input Module Overview The Telefast input module accepts 24 Vdc inputs, and has 6 groups with 16 sink ports each. Specifications The following table provides detailed specifications for the DDI36400 input module. Specifications Number of input points LEDs 96 in six 16 point groups ACT (green) Bus communication is present +32 (green) Points 33 to 64 displayed on LED matrix + 64 (green) Points 65 to96 displayed on LED matrix 1 ...
PAGE 617
I/O Modules Front view of DDI36400 Module The front view of the DDI36400 input module including terminal assignment numbers: 140 DDI 364 00 24 VDC IN 6x16 Sink +32 +64 Act 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 D I50 I52 I54 I56 I58 I60 I62 I64 COM COM I49 I51 I53 I55 I57 I59 I61 I63 NC NC A I01 I03 I05 I07 I09 I11 I13 I15 NC NC E I65 I67 I69 I71 I73 I75 I77 I79 NC NC I66 I68 I70 I72 I74 I76 I78 I80 COM COM I82 I84 I86 I88 I90 I92 I94 I96 COM COM I02 I04 I06 I08 I10 I1
PAGE 618
I/O Modules Selecting Point Status Indicator LEDs Recommended Cables Color Codes for Input groups Use the pushbutton to select input points displayed. LED +32 +64 Inputs 1 to 32 OFF OFF Inputs 33 to 64 ON OFF Inputs 65 to 96 OFF ON The following table shows recommended cables, description, and their length in meters.
PAGE 619
I/O Modules Compatible Connection SubBases The following tables shows the compatible connections sub-bases. See Quantum Modicon Telemecanique Automation Platform, Discrete I/O Chapter, Telefast 2 prewire system: connector cables FOR Quantum PLCs section, for more detailed information.
PAGE 620
I/O Modules 140DDI67300 Quantum I/O DC Input 125 Vdc 3x8 Sink Module Overview The DC Input 125 VDC 3x8 Sink module accepts 125 Vdc inputs and is for use with shared input common wired to positive potential. The module has softwareselectable response time to provide additional input filtering. 620 35013379 02 October 2007 This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., Inc. 800-473-9123 www.barr-thorp.
PAGE 621
I/O Modules Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the DDI67300 125 VDC IN module. Specifications Number of Input Points 24 in three 8 point groups LEDs Active 1 ... 24 (Green) - Indicates point status Required Addressing 2 words in Continuous Operating Voltages and Currents ON (voltage) +88 ... +150 Vdc OFF (voltage) 0 ... +36 Vdc ON (current) 2.0 mA min OFF (current) 0.5 mA max Absolute Maximum Input Continuous 156.
PAGE 622
I/O Modules ON per Group The following figure shows the DDI67300 operating curve. Number of Points Operating Curve 8 7 Operating Voltages 6 125 Vdc 5 4 >140 Vdc 30 40 50 60 Ambient Temperature (°C) Note: The following information baselines minimum version levels that will support this module. 622 35013379 02 October 2007 This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., Inc. 800-473-9123 www.barr-thorp.
PAGE 623
I/O Modules Minimum Version Levels The following table shows the minimum version levels required.Modules marked SV/PV/RL rather than V0X.0X0 exceed the minimum version levels in this table. Products Minimum Version Level (see label illustration User Action Required CPUs and NOMs < V02.20 Executive upgrade to ≥ V02.10 ≥ V02.20 None RIOs < V02.00 Module upgrade ≥ V02.00 and < V02.20 Executive upgrade to ≥ V01.10 > V02.20 None < V02.10 Module upgrade ≥ V02.10 None < V02.40 Upgrade to V02.
PAGE 624
I/O Modules Wiring Diagram The following figure shows the DDI67300 wiring diagram.
PAGE 625
I/O Modules Note: N / C = Not Connected 625 35013379 02 October 2007 This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., Inc. 800-473-9123 www.barr-thorp.
PAGE 626
I/O Modules 140DDI84100 Quantum I/O DC Input 10 ... 60 Vdc 8x2 Sink Module Overview The DC Input 10 ... 60 Vdc 8x2 Sink module accepts 10 ... 60 Vdc inputs and is for use with shared input common wired to positive potential. ON-OFF levels are dependent on the reference voltage selected. Different reference voltages may be used for different groups. 626 35013379 02 October 2007 This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., Inc. 800-473-9123 www.barr-thorp.
PAGE 627
I/O Modules Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the DDI84110 10-60 VDC IN module. Specifications Number of Input Points 16 in eight 2 point groups LEDs Active 1 ... 16 (Green) - Indicates point status Required Addressing Group Supply / Tolerance 12 Vdc / +/-5% 24 Vdc / -15% ... +20% 48 Vdc / -15% ... +20% 60 Vdc / -15% ... +20% 1 Word in ON State* 9 ... 12 11 ... 24 34 ... 48 45 ... 60 OFF State* 0 ...1.8 IEC 57 Class2 0 ... 5 IEC 65A Type2 0 ... 10 IEC 65A Type1 0 ...
PAGE 628
I/O Modules Wiring Diagram The following figure shows the DDI84100 wiring diagram.
PAGE 629
I/O Modules 140DDI85300 Quantum I/O DC Input 10 ... 60 Vdc 4x8 Sink Module Overview The DC Input 10 ... 60 Vdc 4x8 Sink module accepts 10 ... 60 Vdc inputs and is for use with shared input common wired to positive potential. ON-OFF levels are dependent on the reference voltage selected. Different reference voltages may be used for different groups. 629 35013379 02 October 2007 This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., Inc. 800-473-9123 www.barr-thorp.
PAGE 630
I/O Modules Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the 10-60 VDC IN module. Specifications Number of Input Points 32 in four 8 point groups LEDs Active 1 ... 32 (Green) - Indicates point status Required Addressing Group Supply / Tolerance 12 Vdc / +/- 5% 2 Words In ON State * OFF State * 9 ... 12 0 ... 1.8 IEC 57 Class 2 24 Vdc / -15% ... +20% 11 ... 24 0 ... 5 IEC 65A Type 2 48 Vdc / -15% ... +20% 34 ... 48 0 ... 10 IEC 65A Type 1 45 ... 60 0 ... 12.
PAGE 631
I/O Modules Wiring Diagram The following figure shows the DDI85300 wiring diagram.
PAGE 632
I/O Modules 18.6 Discrete Output Modules At a Glance Overview This section provides information on Quantum discrete output modules. What's in this Section? This section contains the following topics: Topic Page I/O Configuration for Discrete Output Modules 633 140DAO84000 I/O AC Output 24 ... 230 Vac 16x1 Module 640 140DAO84010 I/O AC Output 24 ... 115 Vac 16x1 Module 644 140DAO84210 Quantum I/O AC Output 100 ... 230 Vac 4x4 Module 649 140DAO84220 Quantum I/O AC Output 24 ...
PAGE 633
I/O Modules I/O Configuration for Discrete Output Modules Overview This section provides information on configuration of 8-, 12-, 16-, 32- and 96-point output modules. 8-Point Output Modules The following shows the 8-point output module: I/O Map Register Assignment The ouput modules listed above can be configured as either eight contiguous discrete output (0x) references or as one output (4x) register. The following figure shows the format for the output modules.
PAGE 634
I/O Modules Module Zoom Selections (Outputs) Push to display and select the output type and the timeout state for the module. Timeout state is assumed when sytem control of the module is stopped. BIN Output Type: BCD 12-Point Output Module I/O Map Register Assignment (Fault Inputs) The 12-point output module is: z 140DDO88500 The 140DDO88500 can be configured as either 16 contiguous 1x references or as one 3x register. The following figure shows the inputs configuration.
PAGE 635
I/O Modules I/O Map Status Byte (Outputs) The least significant bit in the output I/O map status byte is used as follows. The following figure shows the status byte output register. 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Module Fault (any point fault turns on this bit) Modsoft Module Zoom Selections (Outputs) Push to display and select the output type and the timeout state for the module. Timeout state is assumed when system control of the module is stopped.
PAGE 636
I/O Modules For the 140DAO84000, 140DAO84010, 140DAO84210, 140DAO84220, 140DDO84300, and the 140DRA84000 modules. 1 I/O Map Status Byte 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 The I/O map status byte is used by the 140DAO84210 and 140DAO84220 output modules. The following figure shows I/O map status bytes use.
PAGE 637
I/O Modules I/O Map Register Assignment The output modules listed above can be configured as either 32 contiguous 0x references, or as two 4x registers in the following format. The following figures show the formats for the output modules.
PAGE 638
I/O Modules 96-Point Output Module I/O Map Register Assignment The 96 point output module is: 140DDO36400 - DC out 24VDC 6x16 Source z The following figures show the register 1 through 6 format for the 140DDO36400 output module.
PAGE 639
I/O Modules Module Zoom Selections Push to display and select the output type and the timeout state for the module. Timeout state is assumed when system control of the module is stopped. The following figure shows the output type and timeout state.
PAGE 640
I/O Modules 140DAO84000 I/O AC Output 24 ... 230 Vac 16x1 Module Overview The AC Output 24 ... 230 Vac 16x1 module switches 24 ... 230 Vac powered loads. Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the AC Output 24 ... 230 VAC OUT module. Specifications Number of Output Points 16 isolated LEDs Active 1 ... 16 (Green) - Indicates point status Required Addressing 1 word out Voltage (rms) Working Absolute Maximum 20 ...
PAGE 641
I/O Modules Specifications TOTAL MODULE CURRENT (A) The following figure shows the DAO84000 derating chart. 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 20-132 vms 170-253 vms 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 AMBIENT TEMPERATURE (deg.C) *The specifications stated are pending UL/CSA approval. This module was originally approved at 2 A each point; and 12 A, 0 ... 50° C (115 Vac) and 0 ... 50° C (230 Vac) per module.
PAGE 642
I/O Modules Wiring Diagram The following figure shows the DAO84000 wiring diagram. 5 A (see “Connectivity Compatibility” CAUTION on following page).
PAGE 643
I/O Modules Note: 1. This module is not polarity sensitive. 2. N / C = Not Connected. CAUTION Agency Compliance 1. Voltages up to 133V may be different phases on adjacent output points. 2. Voltages over 133V of different phases must have an output point separation between them. For example: Output 1 and 2 - Phase A, Skip Output 3, Output 4 - Phase B. Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.
PAGE 644
I/O Modules 140DAO84010 I/O AC Output 24 ... 115 Vac 16x1 Module Overview The AC Output 24 ... 115 Vac 16x1 module switches 24 ... 115 Vac powered loads. Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the DAO84010 AC Output 24-115 VAC OUT module. Specifications Number of Output Points 16 isolated LEDs Active 1 ... 16 (Green) – Indicates point status Required Addressing 1 word out Voltage (rms) Working 20 ...
PAGE 645
I/O Modules Specifications The following figure shows the DAO84010 derating chart. TOTAL MODULE CURRENT (A) 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 20-132 V rms 2 1 0 30 35 40 45 50 55 AMBIENT TEMPERATURE (deg. C) 60 Surge Current Maximum (rms) Per Point One Cycle 30 A Two Cycles 20 A Three Cycles 10 A Applied DV / DT 400 V/μs Response OFF - ON ON - OFF Output Protection 0.50 of one line cycle max 0.
PAGE 646
I/O Modules Specifications External Each output point must be fused with an external fuse. The recommended fuse is a 5 A fuse (Part # 043502405 or equivalent) or any other fuse with an I2T rating of less than 87. 646 35013379 02 October 2007 This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., Inc. 800-473-9123 www.barr-thorp.
PAGE 647
I/O Modules Wiring Diagram The following figure shows the DAO84010 wiring diagram.
PAGE 648
I/O Modules Note: 1. This module is not polarity sensitive. 2. N / C = Not Connected CAUTION Connectivity Compatibility Each output point must be fused with an external fuse. The recommended fuse is a 5 A fuse (Part # 043502405), or any other fuse with an I2T rating of less than 87. Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage. 648 35013379 02 October 2007 This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., Inc. 800-473-9123 www.barr-thorp.
PAGE 649
I/O Modules 140DAO84210 Quantum I/O AC Output 100 ... 230 Vac 4x4 Module Overview The AC Output 100 ... 230 Vac 4x4 module switches 100 ... 230 Vac powered loads. Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the 100 ... 230 VAC OUT module. Specifications Number of Output Points 16 in four 4 point groups LEDs Active F 1 ...
PAGE 650
I/O Modules Specifications The following figure shows the DAO84210 derating chart. TOTAL MODULE CURRENT (A) DAO84210 Operating Curve* 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 20-132 V rms 170-253 V rms 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 AMBIENT TEMPERATURE (deg. C) *The specifications stated are pending UL/CSA approval. This module was originally approved at 2 A each point; and 12 A, 0 ... 50° C (115 Vac) and 0 ... 50° C (230 Vac) per module.
PAGE 651
I/O Modules Specifications Internal 5 A fuse for each group. (Part # 043502405 or equivalent). For the location of the fuses see figure below. External User discretion WARNING Possible injury to personnel or equipment First turn off the power to the module to remove the field wiring terminal strip to gain access to the fuses. Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.
PAGE 652
I/O Modules Wiring Diagram The following figure shows the wiring diagram for the DAO84210 module.
PAGE 653
I/O Modules CAUTION Power Compatibility The AC power energizing each group must be from a common, single-phase AC power source. Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage. CAUTION Wiring Compatibility If an external switch is wired to control an inductive load in parallel with the module output, then an external varistor (Harris V390ZA05 or equivalent) must be wired in parallel with the switch.
PAGE 654
I/O Modules 140DAO84220 Quantum I/O AC Output 24 ... 48 Vac 4x4 Module Overview The AC Output 24 ... 48 Vac 4x4 module switches 24 ... 48 Vac powered loads. Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the DAO84220 24 - 48 VAC OUT module. Specifications Number of Output Points 16 in four 4 point groups LEDs Active F 1 ...
PAGE 655
I/O Modules Specifications TOTAL MODULE CURRENT (A) The following figure shows the DAO84220 derating chart. 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 20-56 V rms 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 AMBIENT TEMPERATURE (deg.
PAGE 656
I/O Modules CAUTION Possible injury to personnel or equipment First turn off power to the module and remove the field wiring terminal strip to gain access to fuses. Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage. Fuse Locations The following figure shows the DAO84220 fuse locations. 140 DAO 842 20 10 80 vdc out Fuse Locations Points 1-4 Points 5-8 Points 9-12 X Points 13-16 656 35013379 02 October 2007 This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., Inc.
PAGE 657
I/O Modules Wiring Diagram The following figure shows the DAO84220 wiring diagram.
PAGE 658
I/O Modules CAUTION Power Compatibility The AC power energizing each group must be from a common, single-phase AC power source. Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage. CAUTION Wiring Compatibility If an external switch is wired to control an inductive load in parallel with the module output, then an external varistor (Harris V390ZA05 or equivalent) must be wired in parallel with the switch.
PAGE 659
I/O Modules 140DAO85300 Quantum I/O AC Output 24 ... 230 Vac 4x8 Module Overview The AC Output 230 Vac 4x8 module switches 24 ... 230 Vac powered loads. Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the 230 VAC OUT module. Specifications Number of Output Points 32 in four 8 point fused groups LEDs Active 1 - 32 (Green) - Indicates point status Required Addressing 2 words out Operating Voltages (rms) Working 20 ...
PAGE 660
I/O Modules Specifications TOTAL MODULE CURRENT (A) The following figure shows the DAO85300 derating chart. 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 NO POINT EXCEEDS 0.5A NO POINT EXCEEDS 1.0A 30 35 40 45 50 55 65 60 AMBIENT TEMPERATURE (deg. C) Off State Leakage / Point (max) 2.0 mA @ 230 Vac 1.1 mA @ 115 Vac 0.4 mA @ 48 Vac 0.
PAGE 661
I/O Modules Specifications External Power Not required Fusing Fuse Locations Internal 4 A, 250 V fuse (Little Fuse 217004) for each group. For location of fuses see the Fuse Locations Figure. External User discretion The following figure shows the fuse locations for the DAO85300 module. 140 DAO 853 00 24 230 VAC OUT Fuse Locations Points 1-8 Points 9-16 Points 17-24 X Points 25-32 661 35013379 02 October 2007 This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., Inc. 800-473-9123 www.
PAGE 662
I/O Modules Wiring Diagram The following figure shows the DAO85300 wiring diagram.
PAGE 663
I/O Modules CAUTION Power Compatibility The AC power energizing each group must be from a common, single-phase AC power source. Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage. CAUTION Wiring Compatibility If an external switch is wired to control an inductive load in parallel with the module output, then an external varistor (Harris V390ZA05 or equivalent) must be wired in parallel with the switch.
PAGE 664
I/O Modules 140DDO15310 I/O DC Output 5 V 4x8 Sink Module Overview The DC Output 5 V 4x8 Sink module switches 5 Vdc loads.It is for use with shared output common wired to positive potential and is compatible with TTL, -LS, -S, and CMOS logic. 664 35013379 02 October 2007 This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., Inc. 800-473-9123 www.barr-thorp.
PAGE 665
I/O Modules Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the 5 V OUT module. Specifications Number of Output Points 32 in four 8 point groups LEDs Active F 1 ... 32 (Green) - Indicates point status Required Addressing 2 words out Output Ratings ON Level 0.2 Vdc (max) @ 75 mA sinking OFF Level VOUT = US - 1.25 V @ 1 mA source VOUT = 3.2 V (min) @ 1 mA, US = 4.5 V 440 Ω Internal Pullup Resistor Maximum Load Current Each Point 75 mA (sinking) Each Group 600 mA Per Module 2.
PAGE 666
I/O Modules Module States The following table shows the module states for the DDO15310 module. External Power Command ON OFF ON ON Active Output LED Fault ON >3.2 OFF OFF ON <0.2 ON OFF OFF X X * OFF ON OFF ON ON * ON ON *440 Ω pullup resistor to the power rail X = OFF or ON state CAUTION Possible danger to equipment or personnel. Turn off power to the module and remove the field wiring terminal strip to gain access to fuses.
PAGE 667
I/O Modules Wiring Diagram The following figure shows the DDO15310 wiring diagram.
PAGE 668
I/O Modules 140DDO35300 Quantum I/O DC Output 24 Vdc 4x8 Source Module Overview The DC Output 24 Vdc 4x8 Source module switches 24 Vdc powered loads and is for use with shared output common wired to 0 V. Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the DDO35300 24 VDC OUT module. Specifications Number of Output Points 32 in four 8 point groups LEDs Active F 1 ... 32 (Green) - Indicates point status Required Addressing 2 words out Voltage Operating (max) 19.2 ...
PAGE 669
I/O Modules Specifications Group to Group 500 Vac rms for 1 minute Output to Bus 1780 Vac rms for 1 minute Fault Detection Blown fuse detect, loss of field power Bus Current Required Power Dissipation External Power 330 mA 1.75 W + 0.4 V x Total Module Load Current 19.2 ... 30 Vdc Fusing Internal 5A fuse for each group. Modicon Part # 043502405. For the location of the fuses see Fuse Locations, p. 670.
PAGE 670
I/O Modules Fuse Locations The following figure shows the fuse locations for the DDO35300 module. 140 DDO 353 10 24 vdc out Fuse Locations Points 1-8 Points 9-16 Points 17-24 X Points 25-32 670 35013379 02 October 2007 This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., Inc. 800-473-9123 www.barr-thorp.
PAGE 671
I/O Modules Wiring Diagram The following figure shows the DDO35300 wiring diagram.
PAGE 672
I/O Modules WARNING Possible Equipment Failure Each group is protected with a 5 A fuse to protect the module from catastrophic failure. The group fuse will not be guaranteed to protect each output switch for all possible overload conditions. It is recommended that each point be protected with a 3/4 A, 250 V fuse (Part # 57-0078-000). Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage. 672 35013379 02 October 2007 This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., Inc.
PAGE 673
I/O Modules 140DDO35301 I/O DC Output 24 VDC 4x8 Discrete Source Module Overview The 140DDO35301 source module switches 24 Vdc powered loads, and is short circuit and overload resistant. Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the DDO35301 24 VDC OUT module. Specifications Number of Output Points 32 in four 8-point groups LEDs Active (Green) Bus communication is present F (Red) Group power missing or point faulted 1 ...
PAGE 674
I/O Modules Specifications Fault Detection Group indication: Loss of field power/faulted point Bus Current Required 250 mA max. Power Dissipation 5 W (all points on) External Power 19.2 ... 30 Vdc Fusing Internal 5A fuse for each group. Modicon Part # 043502405. For the location of the fuses see Fuse Locations, p. 674. External User discretion CAUTION Possible danger to equipment or personnel.
PAGE 675
I/O Modules Wiring Diagram The following figure shows the DDO35301 wiring diagram.
PAGE 676
I/O Modules 140DDO35310 I/O DC Output 24 Vdc 4x8 Sink Module Overview The 24 Vdc True Low 4x8 Sink module switches 24 Vdc, and is capable of driving displays, logic, and other loads up to 500 mA sinking, in the ON state. Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the DDO35310 24 VDC OUT SINK module. Specifications Number of Output Points 32 output points in four 8 point groups LEDs Active F 1 ...
PAGE 677
I/O Modules Specifications Load Inductance Maximum 0.5 Henry @ 4 Hz switch frequency or 0.5 L= I2 F where: L = Load Inductance (Henry) I = Load Current (A) F = Switching Frequency (Hz) 50 μf Load Capacitance Maximum Tungsten Load Maximum Output Protection (internal) Bus Current Required Power Dissipation External Power 12 W @ 24 Vdc Transient voltage suppression: 36 V 330 mA max 2.0 W + (0.4 V x Total Load Current) 19.2 ... 30 Vdc Fusing Internal 5.0 A fuse per group. Part # 043502405.
PAGE 678
I/O Modules Fuse Locations The following figure shows the locations of the fuses for the DDO35310 module. 140 DDO 353 10 vdc out Fuse Locations Points 1-8 Points 9-16 Points 17-24 X Points 25-32 678 35013379 02 October 2007 This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., Inc. 800-473-9123 www.barr-thorp.
PAGE 679
I/O Modules Wiring Diagram The following shows the DDO35310 wiring diagram.
PAGE 680
I/O Modules CAUTION Possible Equipment Failure Each group is protected with a 5 A fuse to protect the module from catastrophic failure. The group fuse will not be guaranteed to protect each output switch for all possible overload conditions. It is recommended that each point be fused with a 3/ 4 A, 250 V fuse Part # 57-0078-000. Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage. 680 35013379 02 October 2007 This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., Inc.
PAGE 681
I/O Modules 140DDO36400 I/O DC Output 24VDC 6x16 Telefast Output Module Overview The Telefast Output Source module switches 24 Vdc powered loads. Outputs are thermally protected.
PAGE 682
I/O Modules Specifications Isolation Output to Bus Fault Detection 500 Vac rms for 1 minute Group indication: loss of field power/faulted point (short circuit or overload) Bus Current Required Power Dissipation External Power 250 mA max. 7 W (all points on) 19.2 ... 30 Vdc. 19.2 A maximum (depends on load) Fusing External User discretion for field power 682 35013379 02 October 2007 This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., Inc. 800-473-9123 www.barr-thorp.
PAGE 683
I/O Modules Front view of 140DDO36400 Module The front view of the 140DDO36400 output module including terminal assignment numbers: 140 DDO 364 00 24 VDC OUT 6x16 Source +32 +64 Act F 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 D O49 O51 O53 O55 O57 O59 O61 O63 +24V +24V A O50 O52 O54 O56 O58 O60 O62 O64 COM COM O01 O03 O05 O07 O09 O11 O13 O15 +24V +24V O02 O04 O06 O08 O10 O12 O14 O16 COM COM O66 O68 O70 O72 O74 O76 O78 O80 COM COM O17 O19 O21 O23 O
PAGE 684
I/O Modules Selecting Point Status Indicator LEDs Recommended Cables Use the pushbutton to select output points to be displayed as per the following table: LED +32 +64 Out 1 to 32 Off Off Out 33 to 64 On Off Out 65 to 96 Off On The following table shows recommended cables, description, and their length in meters.
PAGE 685
I/O Modules Compatible Output Adapter Sub-Bases The following tables shows the compatible output adapter sub-bases. See Quantum Modicon Telemecanique Automation Platform, Discrete I/O Chapter, Telefast 2 prewired system: connector cables FOR Quantum PLCs section for more detailed informaton.
PAGE 686
I/O Modules 140DDO84300 Quantum I/O DC Output 10 ... 60 Vdc 2x8 Source Module Overview The DC Output 10 ... 60 Vdc 2x8 Source module switches 10 ... 60 Vdc powered loads and is for use with shared output common wired to 0 V. External power supplies may be mixed between groups. Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the DDO84300 10 ... 60 VDC OUT module. Specifications Number of Output Points 16 in two 8 point groups LEDs Active 1 ...
PAGE 687
I/O Modules Specifications Internal 8A fuse time-lag for each group (Part # 042701994 or equivalent).For location of fuses, see Fuse Locations, p. 687. External Each group is protected with an 8 A fuse to protect the module from catastrophic failure. The group fuse is not guaranteed to protect each output switch for all possible overload conditions. It is recommended that each point be fused with a 2 A fuse: Little Fuse 312-002 or equivalent. CAUTION Possible danger to equipment or personnel.
PAGE 688
I/O Modules Wiring Diagram The following figure shows the DDO84300 wiring diagram.
PAGE 689
I/O Modules 140DDO88500 Quantum I/O DC Output 24-125 Vdc 2x6 Source Module Overview The DC Output 24-125 Vdc 2x6 Source module switches 24-125 VDC powered loads and is for use with shared output common wired to 0 V. Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the DDO88500 24-125 VDC OUT module.
PAGE 690
I/O Modules OUTPUT POINT CURRENT (A) Specifications DDO88500 Output Point Operating Curve 0.75 0.625 0.5 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 AMBIENT TEMPERATURE (deg. C) NOTE: Each group: 3 A, 0 ... 60° C. Per module: 6 A, 0 ... 60° C Inductance Internal diode protected, no limit on inductance Output Response (OFF - ON, ON - OFF) 1.
PAGE 691
I/O Modules Note: Each output point is protected by an over current sense circuit. When an over current condition is detected, the point is turned OFF, its LED fault indicator is turned ON, and the appropriate bit is set in the module fault register. The output point will be turned OFF after a short is detected. A fault greater than 9.4 A will guarantee that the point will be turned OFF and will latch the output point in the OFF state. To clear a fault, the point must be commanded OFF in user logic.
PAGE 692
I/O Modules Wiring Diagram The following figure shows the DDO885 wiring diagram.
PAGE 693
I/O Modules 140DRA84000 Quantum I/O Relay Output 16x1 Normally Open Module Overview The Relay Output 16x1 Normally Open module is used to switch a voltage source using 16 relays with normally open contacts. Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the RELAY OUT module. Specifications Number of Output Points LEDs Required Addressing 16 normally open Active 1 ... 16 (Green) - Indicates point status 1 word out Voltage Working 20 ... 250 Vac 5 ... 30 Vdc 30 ...
PAGE 694
I/O Modules Specifications Electrical Operations (30 ...
PAGE 695
I/O Modules Wiring Diagram The following figure shows the DRA84000 wiring diagram. + RELAY 1 COMMON 2 1 OUTPUT 1 N.O. RELAY 2 COMMON 4 3 OUTPUT 2 N.O. RELAY 3 COMMON 6 5 OUTPUT 3 N.O. RELAY 4 COMMON 8 7 OUTPUT 4 N.O. N/C 10 9 N/C RELAY 5 COMMON 12 11 OUTPUT 5 N.O. RELAY 6 COMMON 14 13 OUTPUT 6 N.O. RELAY 7 COMMON 16 15 OUTPUT 7 N.O. RELAY 8 COMMON 18 17 OUTPUT 8 N.O. 20 19 N/C RELAY 9 COMMON 22 21 OUTPUT 9 N.O. RELAY 10 COMMON 24 23 OUTPUT 10 N.O.
PAGE 696
I/O Modules 140DRC83000 Quantum I/O Relay Output 8x1 Normally Open/Normally Closed Module Overview The Relay Output 8x1 Normally Open/Normally Closed module is used to switch voltage sources using eight relays with normally open and normally closed contacts. Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the DRC83000 RELAY OUT module. Specifications Number of Output Points 8 normally open / normally closed pairs LEDs Active 1 ...
PAGE 697
I/O Modules Specifications Minimum Load Current 50 mA Note: Minimum load current if the contact is used at rated loads of 5 ... 150 Vdc or 20 ... 250 Vac Maximum Frequency (F) 30 Hz resistive loads, or: 0.
PAGE 698
I/O Modules Note: Relay contact life for inductive loads may be significantly increased by using external contact protection such as a clamping diode across the load. Wiring Diagram The following figure shows the DRC83000 wiring diagram. + 2 1 OUTPUT 1 N.O. 4 3 OUTPUT 1 N.C. N/C 6 5 OUTPUT 2 N.O. RELAY 2 COMMON 8 7 N/C 10 9 N/C N/C 12 11 OUTPUT 3 N.O. RELAY 3 COMMON 14 13 16 15 RELAY 4 COMMON 18 17 N/C RELAY 1 COMMON N/C OUTPUT 3 N.C. OUTPUT 4 N.O. OUTPUT 4 N.C.
PAGE 699
I/O Modules Note: 1. When switching DC voltages, it is recommended that the source be connected to the common pin and the load be connected to the N.O. or N.C. contact. 2. For 125 Vdc inductive loads, external clamping is recommended to extend relay contact life (1N 4004 or equivalent). 3. N / C = Not Connected. N.O. = Normally Open. N.C. - Normally Closed. 699 35013379 02 October 2007 This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., Inc. 800-473-9123 www.barr-thorp.
PAGE 700
I/O Modules 18.7 Discrete Verified Output Module At a Glance Overview This section provides information on the discrete verified output module, the 140DVO85300, a 32-point output module. What's in this Section? This section contains the following topics: Topic Page I/O Configuration for the Discrete Verified Output Module – 140DVO85300 701 140DVO85300 I/O Verified 10-30 VDC Out Module 706 700 35013379 02 October 2007 This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., Inc. 800-473-9123 www.
PAGE 701
I/O Modules I/O Configuration for the Discrete Verified Output Module – 140DVO85300 Overview The following provides information on the 140DVO85300 DC verified output 10 - 30 Vdc 32 point module. Verified Output Module The following is the verified output module: I/O Map Register Assignment (Outputs) The 140DVO85300 is configured as two output (4x) registers.
PAGE 702
I/O Modules I/O Map Status Byte The eight bits in the I/O map status byte are used as follows: 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Group A Voltage Fault Group B Voltage Fault Group C Voltage fault Group D Voltage Fault Group A Miscompare Group B Miscompare Group C Miscompare Group D Miscompare The voltage fault bit is set when the field supply is not present, or the group fuse is blown. The miscompare bit is set when any point within the group does not match its commanded state.
PAGE 703
I/O Modules Zoom Screen Selection Descriptions Output Shutdown State - Determines the module output states if backplane communication is lost (i.e., no "Active" LED on module). Output Shutdown State: Fail States Disabled Fail States: Group outputs are per the selection made in the “Fail States” column. Disabled: Forces all outputs to be in the OFF state. Fail States - Module output state choices if selected in "Output Shutdown State" menu.
PAGE 704
I/O Modules Status/Input - RE: I/O map register assignments (Inputs). Status/Input Verified Health Verified Fault Input Only Actual Verified Health: The associated bit = 1 when the point output command and module output state agree Verified Fault: The associated bit = 1 when the point output command and module output state disagree. Input Only: Input module operation for diagnostic purposes only. When an output point has a high applied, the associated 1x bit or 3x register location = 1.
PAGE 705
I/O Modules State of output point, Status bits, LEDs and Fault Bit for the three operating states are as follows: Mode Fault Occurs (Point commanded ON shuts OFF) Off command sent On command sent (After fault is removed) Verified health Output point=OFF Status bit=0 Output LED=OFF Fault LED=ON Group fault flag=1 Output point=OFF Status bit=0 Output LED=OFF Fault LED=ON Group fault flag=1 Output point=ON Status bit=1 Output LED=ON Fault LED=OFF Group fault flag=0 Verified fault Output point=OFF Sta
PAGE 706
I/O Modules 140DVO85300 I/O Verified 10-30 VDC Out Module Overview The Quantum Verified Output module is a 10 ... 30 Vdc, 32 point output module with diagnostic capability. The module will detect and report the output state sensed at the field connector and, depending on the selected configuration, will verify that the output point is in the state commanded by the PLC. The module is configured in four groups of eight source outputs.
PAGE 707
I/O Modules Specifications Tungsten Load Maximum 2.5 W @ 10 Vdc 3 W @ 12 Vdc 6 W @ 24 Vdc 75 μf Load Capacitance Maximum Isolation Group to Bus Group to Group 1780 Vac RMS for 1 minute 500 Vac for 1 minute Output Protection (internal) Transient voltage suppression, overload (short circuit) protection Fault Detection Blown fuse detect, loss of power, incorrect output state Bus Current Required Power Dissipation External Power 500 mA [2.5 + (0.1 x No. of points ON) + (total load current x 0.
PAGE 708
I/O Modules Fuse Locations A view of fuse locations on the module is shown below. 140 DVO 853 00 10-30 VDC OUT Points 1-8 Fuse Locations Points 9-16 Points 17-24 Points 25-32 X CAUTION Possible danger to equipment or personnel. Turn off power to the module and remove the field wiring terminal strip to gain access to fuses. Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage. 708 35013379 02 October 2007 This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., Inc.
PAGE 709
I/O Modules Wiring Diagram A wiring diagram for the Quantum 140DVO85300 module is shown below.
PAGE 710
I/O Modules 18.8 Discrete Supervised Input Module At a Glance Overview This section provides information on the discrete supervised input module, the 140DSI35300, a 32-point input module. What's in this Section? This section contains the following topics: Topic Page I/O Configuration for the Discrete Supervised Input Module – 140DSI35300 711 140DSI35300 I/O DC 24V Supervised Input Module 712 710 35013379 02 October 2007 This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., Inc. 800-473-9123 www.
PAGE 711
I/O Modules I/O Configuration for the Discrete Supervised Input Module – 140DSI35300 Overview The following provides information on the 140DSI35300 supervised input 24 Vdc 32point module. Supervised Input Module The following is the supervised input module: I/O Map Register Assignment (Input) The DSI35300 is configured as four input (3x) registers.
PAGE 712
I/O Modules 140DSI35300 I/O DC 24V Supervised Input Module Overview The Supervised Input module is used with source output devices. It accepts 24 Vdc inputs. It has 32 Sink input points (four groups of 8), each with broken wire detection. 712 35013379 02 October 2007 This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., Inc. 800-473-9123 www.barr-thorp.
PAGE 713
I/O Modules Specifications The following table shows the technical specifications for the 140DSI35300 module: Specifications Number of Input Points 32 in four 8 point groups` LEDs Active (Green) Indicates bus communication present 1 ... 32 (Green) Indicates point status F (Red) External Supply missing Required addressing 4 words in Operating Voltage and Current ON (voltage) +11 Vdc ON (current) 2.5 mA min. OFF (voltage) +5 Vdc OFF (current) min. 0.3 mA ...1.
PAGE 714
I/O Modules Wiring Diagram Wiring diagram for the 140DSI35300 Module: INPUT 2 2 1 INPUT 1 INPUT 4 4 3 INPUT 3 INPUT 6 6 5 INPUT 5 INPUT 8 8 7 INPUT 7 GROUP A SUPPLY 10 9 GROUP A COMMON INPUT 10 12 11 INPUT 9 INPUT 12 14 13 INPUT 11 INPUT 14 16 15 INPUT 16 18 17 INPUT 15 20 19 GROUP B COMMON INPUT 18 22 21 INPUT 17 INPUT 20 24 23 INPUT 19 INPUT 22 26 25 INPUT 21 INPUT 24 28 27 INPUT 23 GROUP C SUPPLY 30 29 GROUP C COMMON INPUT 26 32 31 INPUT 25
PAGE 715
I/O Modules 18.9 Discrete Input/Output Modules At a Glance Overview This section provides information on the Quantum discrete input/output modules: the 140DDM39000 and the 140DDM69000.
PAGE 716
I/O Modules I/O Configuration for Discrete Input/Output Modules Overview 4-Point Input/4Point Output Module I/O Map Register Assignments This section provides information on configuration of 4 In/4 Out and 16 In/8 Out modules. The following shows the 4 In/4 Out module: z 140DDM69000 (125 Vdc Input/High Power Output) The 140DDM69000 input/output module can be configured as either eight contiguous 1x references; or as one 3x register and either eight contiguous 0x references or one 4x register.
PAGE 717
I/O Modules Modsoft Module Zoom Selection (Inputs) Push to display and select the Dual Mode and Filter Select options. Dual Mode: Disabled Enabled When Dual Mode Is Enabled 1. Output 1 is turned ON when Input 1 and Input 2 are ON and when both “Fast Trip 1 Enable” and “Fast Trip 2 Enable” are enabled; or by directly turning ON the Output 1 bit. 2. Output 2 is controlled by the Output 2 bit. 3.
PAGE 718
I/O Modules I/O Map Status Byte (Outputs) The four least significant bits in the I/O map status are used as follows: 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Output 1 Fault Output 2 Fault Output 3 Fault Output 4 Fault Modsoft Module Zoom Selections (Outputs) Push to display and select the timeout state for the module. Timeout state is assumed when the system control of the module is stopped.
PAGE 719
I/O Modules Module Zoom Selections (Inputs) Push to display and select the input type. This selection appears if the module is I/O mapped to a 3x register and one 4x register. input Type: BIN BCD I/O Map Assignment (Outputs) The modules listed above can be configured as 8 0x references or as 1 output (4x) register in the following format. 1 I/O Map Status Byte (Outputs) 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 The two least significant bits in the output I/O map status byte are used as follows.
PAGE 720
I/O Modules 140DAM59000 Quantum I/O AC Input 115 Vac 2x8 / AC Output 115 Vac 2x4) Overview The AC Input 115 Vac 2x8 / AC Output 115 Vac 2x4 module accepts 115 Vac inputs and switches 115 Vac loads. Topology Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the 115 VAC and AC IN/OUT module for the Topology. Topology Number of Input Points 16 in two 8 point groups Number of Output Points 8 in two 4 point groups LEDs Active F (red) - No power applied to the group(s) or blown fuse 1 ...
PAGE 721
I/O Modules Input Specifications The following table shows the Input specifications. Input Specifications Operating Voltages and Input (Wetting) Currents* 50 Hz Typical Input Impedance 60 Hz Typical Input Impedance ON: 85 ... 132 Vac (11.1 mA max) OFF: 0 ... 20 Vac 14.4 kΩ capacitive ON: 79 ... 132 Vac (13.2 mA max) OFF: 0 ... 20 Vac 12 kΩ capacitive *Do not use outside the 47 ... 63 Hz range. Maximum Allowable Leakage Current from an External Device to be Recognized as an OFF Condition 2.
PAGE 722
I/O Modules Output Specifications The following table shows the Output specifications. Output Specifications Absolute Maximum Output Voltages Continuous 85 ... 132 Vac 10 seconds 156 Vac 1 cycle 200 Vac On State Drop / Point 1.
PAGE 723
I/O Modules Common Specifications The following table shows the Common specifications. Common Specifications Frequency 47 ... 63 Hz Isolation Group to Group 1000 Vac for 1 minute Input or Output to Bus 1780 Vac for 1 minute Fault Detection Input Output None Blown fuse detect, loss of field power Bus Current Required 250 mA Power Dissipation 5.5 W + 1.1 V x Total module load current External Power 85 ...
PAGE 724
I/O Modules Fuse Locations The following figure shows the fuse locations for the DAM59000 module. 140 DAM 590 00 120 VAC IN/OUT Fuse Locations Points 1-4 Points 5-8 X Note: If the 140DAM59000 module is used in a RIO drop, the 140CRA93X00 RIO Drop must be Version 1.04 at a minimum.
PAGE 725
I/O Modules Wiring Diagram The following figure shows the DAM590wiring diagram.
PAGE 726
I/O Modules Note: 1. This module is not polarity sensitive. 2. N / C = Not Connected. CAUTION AC Power Compatibility The AC power energizing each group must be from a common single phase AC power source. Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage. CAUTION Wiring Compatibility If an external switch is wired to control an inductive load in parallel with the module output, then an external varistor (Harris V390ZA05 or equivalent) must be wired in parallel with the switch.
PAGE 727
I/O Modules 140DDM39000 I/O DC Input 24 Vdc 2x8 Sink/DC Output 24 Vdc 2x4 Source Module Overview The DC Input 24 Vdc 2x8 Sink / DC Output 24 Vdc 2x4 Source module accepts and switches 24 Vdc inputs/outputs and is for use with sink input and source output devices. Topology The following table shows the topology for the DDM39000 module.
PAGE 728
I/O Modules Output Specifications The following table shows the output specifications for the DDM39000 module. Output Specifications Voltage (Output) Operating (max) 19.2 ... 30 Vdc Absolute (max) 56 Vdc for 1.3 ms decaying voltage pulse ON State Drop / Point 0.4 Vdc @ 0.5 A Maximum Load Current Each Point 0.5 A Each Group 2A Per Module 4A Off State Leakage / Point 0.
PAGE 729
I/O Modules Common Specifications The following table shows the common specifications for the DDM39000 module.
PAGE 730
I/O Modules CAUTION Possible injury to personnel or equipment. Turn off power to the module and remove the field wiring terminal strip to gain access to fuses. Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage. Fuse Locations The following figure shows the fuse locations of the DDM39000 module. 140 DDM 390 00 10 80 VDC OUT Fuse Locations Points 1-4 Points 5-8 X Note: If the 140DDM39000 module is used in an RIO drop, the 140CRA93X00 RIO Drop must be Version 1.
PAGE 731
I/O Modules Version Label The following figure shows the location of the version label. RIO DROP S908 01.04 140 CRA 932 00 RIO DROP 731 35013379 02 October 2007 This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., Inc. 800-473-9123 www.barr-thorp.
PAGE 732
I/O Modules Wiring Diagram The following figure shows the DDM39000 wiring diagram. N/C 2 1 N/C 4 3 N/C 6 5 N/C 8 7 10 9 N/C 12 11 N/C 14 13 N/C 16 15 N/C 18 17 20 19 22 21 24 23 26 25 28 27 N/C 30 29 INPUT 10 32 31 34 33 INPUT 14 36 35 INPUT 16 38 37 N/C 40 39 OUTPUT GROUP A SUPPLY OUTPUT 1 1.25 A – OUTPUT 2 + OUTPUT 3 OUTPUT 4 1.
PAGE 733
I/O Modules CAUTION Possible Equipment Failure Each group is protected with a 5 A fuse to protect the module from catastrophic failure. The group fuse will not be guaranteed to protect each output switch for all possible overload conditions. It is recommended that each point be fused with a 1.25 A fuse, Part # 043508930 (Littlefuse 3121.25, 1.25 A, 250 V). Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.
PAGE 734
I/O Modules 140DDM69000 I/O 125 VDC Input/High Power Output Module Overview The 125 VDC Input/High Power Output module provides four isolated outputs and four grouped inputs. The outputs switch 24 to 125 Vdc powered loads and are for use with sink and source devices. The outputs also have short-circuit sense, indication, and shutdown circuitry. The inputs accept 125 Vdc inputs and are for use with source output devices.
PAGE 735
I/O Modules Output Specifications The following table shows the output specifications for the DDM69000 module. Output Specifications Voltage (Output) Operating (max) 19.2 ... 156.2 Vdc including ripple ON State Drop / Point 0.75 Vdc @ 4 A Maximum Load Current Each Point 4 A continuous Per Module 16 A continuous (see the derating curve below) Off State Leakage / Point 1.2 mA @ 150 Vdc Output Response (OFF-ON, ON-OFF) 0.
PAGE 736
I/O Modules Common Specifications The following table shows the common specifications for the DDM69000 module.
PAGE 737
I/O Modules Version Levels The following table shows the required version levels. Modules marked with SV/PV/ RL rather than V0X.X0 exceed the minimum version levels in this table Products Minimum Version Level (see lable illustration) User Action Required CPUs and NOMs < V02.20 Executive upgrade to ≥ V02.10 ≥ V02.20 None RIOs < V02.00 Module upgrade ≥ V02.00 and < V02.20 Executive upgrade to ≥ V01.10 ≥ V02.20 None < V02.10 Module upgrade ≥ V02.10 None < V02.40 Upgrade to V02.40 ≥ V02.
PAGE 738
I/O Modules Wiring Diagram The following figure shows the DDM69000 wiring diagram.
PAGE 739
I/O Modules CAUTION Polarity awareness The output points are not protected against reverse polarity. Reverse polarity will turn an output point ON. Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage. 739 35013379 02 October 2007 This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., Inc. 800-473-9123 www.barr-thorp.
PAGE 740
I/O Modules 740 35013379 02 October 2007 This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., Inc. 800-473-9123 www.barr-thorp.
PAGE 741
Appendices At a Glance Overview These appendices provide information on miscellaneous components and spare parts; hardware installation instructions; power and grounding considerations; the CableFast cabling system; error stopped codes; agency approvals of Quantum products; and troubleshooting tools and resources.
PAGE 742
Appendices 742 35013379 02 October 2007 This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., Inc. 800-473-9123 www.barr-thorp.
PAGE 743
Miscellaneous Components A Miscellaneous Components Overview This appendix contains information on cabling and illustrations of miscellaneous components. For more detailed information on Modbus Plus components, see the Modbus Plus Network Planning and Installation Guide, Part Number 890USE10000. For more detailed information on Remote I/O components, see the Remote I/O Cable Planning and Installation Guide, Part Number 890USE10100. Cables The following table shows the available cables.
PAGE 744
Misc. Components Modbus Plus Cable Connector Orientation The following figure shows the connector orientation for the 990NAD21XX0. 990NAD218/219X0 Connector Orientation 990NAD218X0 990NAD219X0 Coding Kit, 140XCP20000 The following figure shows the coding kit – a typical 1 set of 18 (Plastic Keys: 6 white sets, 12 yellow sets), part number 140XCP20000. Empty Module, 140XCP50000 The following figure shows an empty module without a terminal strip, part number 140XCP50000.
PAGE 745
Misc. Components Empty Module with Door Cover, 140XCP51000 The following figure shows an empty module without the terminal strip and with a door cover, part number 140XCP51000. X Terminal Strip Jumper Kit, 140XCP60000 The following figure shows the terminal strip jumper kit (qty: 12), part number 140XCP60000. 745 35013379 02 October 2007 This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., Inc. 800-473-9123 www.barr-thorp.
PAGE 746
Misc. Components Field Wiring Terminal Strip, 140XTS00200 The following figure shows the 40-pin field wiring terminal strip, part number 140XTS00200. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X Customer Identification Label 1 X 2 X X X 4 X 10 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X 12 6 8 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39 746 35013379 02 October 2007 This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., Inc. 800-473-9123 www.barr-thorp.
PAGE 747
Misc. Components IP 20 Compliant Field Wiring Terminal Strips, 140XTS00100 and 140XTS00500 The following figure shows the 40-pin field wiring terminal strip with IP 20 compatible, finger-safe, fixed terminal screw shield, part number 140XTS00100.
PAGE 748
Misc. Components Battery, 990XCP90000 The following figure shows the battery for the Battery Module, part number 990XCP90000. CAUTION Pull on this tape to remove battery. Do not use metallic tool. Batt. install date: CPU Battery, 990XCP98000 The following figure shows the CPU battery, part number 990XCP98000. Modbus Plus Tap The following figure shows the Modbus Plus Network tap, part number 990NAD23000. 748 35013379 02 October 2007 This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., Inc.
PAGE 749
Misc. Components Modbus Plus Ruggedized Tap The following figure shows the Modbus Plus Network ruggedized tap, part number 990NAD23010.This tap is mounted on the ruggedized Modbus Plus tap din rail mounting bracket, part number 990NAD23012. Modbus Plus Ruggedized Tap Terminator The following figure shows the Modbus Plus network terminator plug, part number 990NAD23011, for the ruggedized Modbus Plus tap.
PAGE 750
Misc. Components I/O Conversion Connector The following figure shows the 200 series I/O conversion connector, part number 990XTS00300. 1 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 18 19 20 MODICON MODICON 16 17 990XTS00300 B200 CONVERSION CONNECTOR MODICON 3 4 990XTS00300 990XTS00300 B200 B200 CONVERSION CONVERSION CONNECTOR CONNECTOR 2 21 Front View Remote I/O Tap Side View The following figure shows the remote I/O network tap, part number MA-0185-100.
PAGE 751
Misc. Components Remote I/O Splitter The following figure shows the remote network I/O splitter, part number MA-0186-100. MODICON AN AEG COMPANY TRUNK SPLITTER MA 0331 000 RCV/A OUT OUT RG-6 Remote I/O F Connector The following figure shows the remote I/O network F connector, part number MA0329-001. This is the F connector for quad shield RG 6 cable.
PAGE 752
Misc. Components 752 35013379 02 October 2007 This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., Inc. 800-473-9123 www.barr-thorp.
PAGE 753
Spare Parts B Spare Parts Overview This section provides information on miscellaneous spare parts and fuses. 753 35013379 02 October 2007 This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., Inc. 800-473-9123 www.barr-thorp.
PAGE 754
Spare Parts Miscellaneous Spare Parts The following table shows the miscellaneous spare parts for the Quantum modules.
PAGE 755
Spare Parts Fuses The following table shows the fuses for the Quantum modules. Part Number/Fuse Type Fuse Value Fuse Holder 042701994 8 A SloBlo Not required 043502405 5 A SloBlo Wickman 820 (Holder*) Wickman 835 (Flush Cap) 043502515 1.5 A SloBlo Wickman 5700000000 (Holder*) Wickman 5750000100 (Cover) 043502516 2.5 A SloBlo Wickman 5700000000 (Holder*) Wickman 5750000100 (Cover) 043503948 2.5 A Not required 043508930 1.
PAGE 756
Spare Parts 756 35013379 02 October 2007 This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., Inc. 800-473-9123 www.barr-thorp.
PAGE 757
Hardware Installation C At a Glance Introduction This section provides information on selecting backplanes, selecting mounting brackets, space requirements for the Quantum system and mounting Quantum modules.
PAGE 758
Hardware Installation Hardware Installation – Selecting Backplanes Overview Backplanes are designed to mechanically secure and electrically connect all modules used in drops. The backplane contains a passive circuit board which permits modules to communicate with each other and to identify their slot numbers without further switch settings. Refer to the following tables for front view illustrations and dimensions of the backplanes (all backplane dimensions are nominal).
PAGE 759
Hardware Installation Two Position Backplane Figure The following figure shows the two position backplane. G =Mounting Hole Diameter: 8mm/0.31 inches. F H =Optional locations for Modbus Plus communication cable grounding. Diameter: 8 mm/0.31 inches =Threaded mounting holes for half and full height modules. Diameter: 4mm/0.16 inches A B C D E A B C D E F G H Ground Screws 290 mm / 11.42 inches 270 mm / 10.63 inches 175.5 mm / 6.91 inches 94.5 mm / 3.72 inches 10 mm / 0.39 inches 15 mm / 0.
PAGE 760
Hardware Installation Three Position Backplane Figure The following figure shows the three position backplane. G F H =Mounting Hole Diameter: 8mm/0.31 inches. =Optional locations for Modbus Plus communication cable grounding. Diameter: 8 mm/0.31 inches =Threaded mounting holes for half and full height modules. Diameter: 4mm/0.16 inches A B C D E A B C D E F G H Ground Screws 290 mm / 11.42 inches 270 mm / 10.63 inches 175.5 mm / 6.91 inches 94.5 mm / 3.72 inches 10 mm / 0.39 inches 15 mm / 0.
PAGE 761
Hardware Installation Four Position Backplane Figure The following figure shows the four position backplane. G F H A B C D E Ground Screws =Mounting Hole Diameter: 8mm/0.31 inches. =Optional locations for Modbus Plus communication cable grounding. Diameter: 8 mm/0.31 inches =Threaded mounting holes for half and full height modules. Diameter: 4mm/0.16 inches A B C D E F G H 290 mm / 11.42 inches 270 mm / 10.63 inches 175.5 mm / 6.91 inches 94.5 mm / 3.72 inches 10 mm / 0.39 inches 15 mm / 0.
PAGE 762
Hardware Installation Six Position Backplane Figure The following figure shows the six position backplane. G F H A B C D E Ground Screws =Mounting Hole Diameter: 8mm/0.31 inches. =Optional locations for Modbus Plus communication cable grounding. Diameter: 8 mm/0.31 inches =Threaded mounting holes for half and full height modules. Diameter: 4mm/0.16 inches A B C D E F G H 290 mm / 11.42 inches 270 mm / 10.63 inches 175.5 mm / 6.91 inches 94.5 mm / 3.72 inches 10 mm / 0.39 inches 15 mm / 0.
PAGE 763
Hardware Installation Ten Position Backplane Figure The following figure shows the ten position backplane. G F I H A B C D E Ground Screws =Mounting Hole Diameter: 8mm/0.31 inches. =Optional locations for Modbus Plus communication cable grounding. Diameter: 8 mm/0.31 inches =Threaded mounting holes for half and full height modules. Diameter: 4mm/0.16 inches A B C D E F G H I 290 mm / 11.42 inches 270 mm / 10.63 inches 175.5 mm / 6.91 inches 94.5 mm / 3.72 inches 10 mm / 0.39 inches 15 mm / 0.
PAGE 764
Hardware Installation Sixteen Position Backplane Figure The following figure shows the sixteen position backplane. G F H I J A B C D E Ground Screws =Mounting Hole Diameter: 8mm/0.31 inches. =Optional locations for Modbus Plus communication cable grounding. Diameter: 8 mm/0.31 inches =Threaded mounting holes for half and full height modules. Diameter: 4mm/0.16 inches A B C D E F G H I J 290 mm / 11.42 inches 270 mm / 10.63 inches 175.5 mm / 6.91 inches 94.5 mm / 3.72 inches 10 mm / 0.
PAGE 765
Hardware Installation Hardware Installation – Mounting Brackets Overview Brackets are required when mounting backplanes in 19 inch NEMA cabinets. These brackets support the 2 through 10 position backplanes. The bracket mounts to rails using standard NEMA hardware. Mounting brackets are offered in two sizes: 20 mm for back rail mounting, and 125 mm for front rail mounting (refer to the following illustrations). Backplane Mounting Brackets The following table shows the mounting brackets.
PAGE 766
Hardware Installation 125 mm Mounting Bracket The following figure shows the 125 mm mounting bracket. A I B K C E L D M F G N H J Diameter of the mounting holes: 6.6 mm / 0.26 inches A B C D E F G H I J K L M N 125 mm / 4.92 inches 22.83 mm / 0.90 inches 17.5 mm / 0.69 inches 88.9 mm / 3.50 inches 7.1 mm / 0.28 inches 146.1 mm / 5.75 inches 88.9 mm / 3.50 inches 14.7 mm / 0.58 inches 436.6 mm / 17.19 inches 482.25 mm / 18.99 inches 20.2 mm / 0.79 inches 94.5 mm / 3.72 inches 175.5 mm / 6.
PAGE 767
Hardware Installation 20 mm Mounting Bracket The following figure shows the 20 mm mounting bracket. A I B K C E F L D M G N H J Diameter of the mounting holes: 6.6 mm / 0.26 inches A B C D E F G H I J K L M N 20 mm / 0.79 inches 22.83 mm / 0.90 inches 17.5 mm / 0.69 inches 88.9 mm / 3.50 inches 7.1 mm / 0.28 inches 146.1 mm / 5.75 inches 88.9 mm / 3.50 inches 14.7 mm / 0.58 inches 436.6 mm / 17.19 inches 482.25 mm / 18.99 inches 20.2 mm / 0.79 inches 94.5 mm / 3.72 inches 175.5 mm / 6.
PAGE 768
Hardware Installation Hardware Installation – Space Requirements for the Quantum System Overview When mounting Quantum systems in a cabinet, a 4 in. (101.60 mm) space should be maintained above and below the modules. Side spacing should be 1 in. (25.40 mm) minimum. Wiring ducts up to 2 in. (50.80 mm) square may be centered horizontally between backplanes. Duct work or similar items mounted in this manner that extend further out than 2 in. require a 4 in. space (instead of 1 in.
PAGE 769
Hardware Installation Spacing Requirements Figure The following figure shows the Quantum system spacing requirements. Top of Cabinet 4” (101.60 mm) 2” x 2” Maximum (50.80 x 50.80 mm) Wire Duct 1” (25.40 mm) 4” (101.60 mm) 1” (25.40 mm) 4” (101.60 mm) Bottom of Cabinet 769 35013379 02 October 2007 This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., Inc. 800-473-9123 www.barr-thorp.
PAGE 770
Hardware Installation Hardware Installation – Mounting Quantum Modules Overview Quantum modules, with the exception of power supply modules, can be inserted into any slot of any backplane, and, with the added exception of CPU modules, can be removed under power (hot swapped) without damaging modules or the backplane; power supply modules must be installed in the first or last slots of the backplane. Refer to the following figures and procedure when mounting modules.
PAGE 771
Hardware Installation Mounting Quantum Modules The following figure shows a step-by-step procedure for mounting Quantum modules. 1 If required for the application, select and install a 20 mm or 125 mm mounting bracket to the rack using standard hardware. 2 Select and install the appropriate backplane to the mounting bracket using standard hardware and remove the plastic backplane connector dust covers. 1 Power Supply 3 2 a.
PAGE 772
Hardware Installation Installing Module Terminal Strip Jumper Clips Terminal strip jumper clips (see below) are installed when contiguous I/O points need to be jumpered (i.e., the AVO 020 00 Analog Voltage Out module). Follow the procedure below for installing jumper clips. 1 Turn power off to the system. 2 Remove the terminal strip from the module (see next page). 3 Loosen the terminal strip I/O screws of the points that you want jumpered.
PAGE 773
Hardware Installation Removing a Quantum I/O Terminal Strip The Quantum Automation Series I/O terminal strips have been designed with a pry slot to assist in their removal. Follow the procedure below to remove the terminal strip. Pry Slot (Insert screwdriver) 140 DDO84300 10-80 Vdc Out 1 Loosen the terminal strip mounting screws located at the top and bottom of the terminal strip. 2 Located the pry slot at the top of the terminal strip near the top mounting screw.
PAGE 774
Hardware Installation Removing a Quantum Module Door The Quantum Automation Series module terminal strips have been designed with a flexible, removable door to allow for easier wiring and access to the terminal strip. Follow the procedure below to remove the module door. 140 DDO84300 10-80 VDC OUT 1 Open the module door. 2 Place your thumb near the middle of the door (as illustrated).
PAGE 775
Power and Grounding Guidelines D At a Glance Introduction This section provides information of power and grounding considerations for AC and DC powered systems, system design considerations for Quantum power supplies, grounding and closed system installation.
PAGE 776
Pwr. & Grnding. Guide Power and Grounding Considerations for AC and DC Powered Systems Overview The required power and grounding configurations for AC powered and DC powered systems are shown in the following illustrations. Each backplane shown has its own ground connection; that is, a separate wire returning to the main grounding point, rather than "daisy chaining" the grounds between power supplies or mounting plates.
PAGE 777
Pwr. & Grnding. Guide Note: This power and grounding configuration is compliant with the CE standards for the 140CPS11420 and 140CPS12420 power supplies, and for the 140CPS11100 (PV 01 or greater) power supply. DC Powered Systems The following figure shows the DC powered systems.
PAGE 778
Pwr. & Grnding. Guide AC Powered Systems for CE Compliance The following figure shows the AC powered systems for CE compliance. REDUNDANT/SUMMABLE POWER SUPPLY See detailed AC Powered System Figure.
PAGE 779
Pwr. & Grnding. Guide Detailed AC Powered System The following figure shows the details for the AC powered system for CE compliance.
PAGE 780
Pwr. & Grnding. Guide Callout Vendor (or equivalent) Part Number Description Instruction 3 Schaffner FvN670-3/06 Line Filter (fast on terminals) Dimensions: Length: 3.4" (85 mm) Width: 2.2" (55 mm) Height: 1.6" (40 mm) Mounting Holes: 0.2 in (5.3 mm) dia., 3 in (75 MM) centerline mounted. Fast on terminals: 0.25 in (6.4 mm) Install next to the power supply. 4 N/A N/A Ground Braid Flat braid 0.
PAGE 781
Pwr. & Grnding. Guide CAUTION European compliance To maintain CE compliance with the European Directive on EMC (89/336/EEC) and the Low Voltage Directive (73/23/EEC), the 140CPS21100, the 140CRA21120, and the 140CRA21220 must be installed in accordance with these instructions. Failure to follow this instruction can result in injury or equipment damage. 781 35013379 02 October 2007 This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., Inc. 800-473-9123 www.barr-thorp.
PAGE 782
Pwr. & Grnding. Guide Detailed System for CE Compliance The following figure shows the detailed installation for the CE compliance system and the parts list callouts.
PAGE 783
Pwr. & Grnding. Guide 125 Vdc Powered System The following figure shows the 125 Vdc powered system for CE compliance. See detailed illustration on next page.
PAGE 784
Pwr. & Grnding. Guide 125 Vdc Powered Installation The following figure shows the detailed installation for the 125 Vdc powered system for CE compliance with parts list callouts.
PAGE 785
Pwr. & Grnding. Guide The following table provides a list of parts for the 125 Vdc Powered Installation Figure.. Callout Vendor (or equivalent) Part Number Description Instruction 1 Offlex Series 100cy 35005 Line Cord Terminate the shield at the power supply ground terminal 2 Steward 28 BO686-200 Ferrite Bead Fair Rite 2643665702 Install next to the filter and secure with tie wraps at Both ends of the ferrite bead.
PAGE 786
Pwr. & Grnding. Guide System Design Considerations for Quantum Power Supplies Overview There exist some important design differences between various models of Quantum power supplies that require careful consideration by the system designer in order to achieve maximum system performance. The principal difference lies in the generation within the power supply of important backplane signals related to the health of the power supply and the status of the input power.
PAGE 787
Pwr. & Grnding. Guide Standalone Power Supplies Three models of standalone power supplies are offered. • 140CPS11100 115...230 Vac input 3 A output • 140CPS21100 24 Vdc input 3 A output • 140CPS51100 125 Vdc input 3 A output CAUTION Equipment compatibility. Standalone units must be the only power supply installed in a backplane. No fault tolerant or redundant capability exists in systems powered by standalone power supplies.
PAGE 788
Pwr. & Grnding. Guide Summable Power Supplies Four summable power supply models are offered. • 140CPS11410 115...230 Vac input 8 A output • 140CPS11420 115...230 Vac input 11 A output • 140CPS21400 24 Vdc input 8 A output • 140CPS41400 48 Vdc input 8 A output A summable power supply may be used as a standalone power supply without reservation in any Quantum system.
PAGE 789
Pwr. & Grnding. Guide The proper method for starting systems powered by summable power supplies is to insert both supplies in the backplane in an unpowered state, and then apply power to each supply. For 140CPS11410, 140CPS21400, and 140CPS414 models, there is no requirement to power each supply simultaneously. For 140CPS11420, or wherever this module is operated with a 140CPS11410, the delay between the two powering times should not be greater than five seconds.
PAGE 790
Pwr. & Grnding. Guide Another important difference from the summable system is the total available system backplane loading. If there are N redundant power supplies installed in a backplane, the total backplane load must not exceed the capability of N – 1 supplies. For example: z z If three 8 A redundant power supplies are installed (N = 3), the maximum backplane load available for redundant operation is the current sourced by N – 1 ( = 2) supplies, which is 16 A.
PAGE 791
Pwr. & Grnding. Guide Compatibility Issues of power supplies z z z z With the exception of standalone models, power supplies with the same model number are always compatible when installed in the same backplane. Do not use a standalone power supply in combination with any other supply in the same backplane.
PAGE 792
Pwr. & Grnding. Guide Table of combination This table shows the different possible combinations of Quantum power supplies.
PAGE 793
Pwr. & Grnding. Guide Grounding Overview This appendix provides information on grounding issues for the chassis, power supply Modbus Plus, and other equipment and system requirements. Chassis Grounding A chassis ground wire is required for each backplane. The wire is connected between one of four ground screws (located on the backplane) and the main ground point of the power system.
PAGE 794
Pwr. & Grnding. Guide Modbus Plus Grounding Figure The following figure shows Modbus Plus grounding information. Loop Clamp (supplied with Modbus Plus Tap) Modbus Plus Drop Cable Ground Screws 0.5 in (13 mm) 11.8 in (30 cm) min max Remove outer jacket to expose the shield braid. Existing backplane ground screw may be used if wire space and clearance allows. MB+ Use holes along backplane mounting flange to secure clamp. Customer electrical panel may need to be drilled and tapped.
PAGE 795
Pwr. & Grnding. Guide Closed System Installation Overview For installations that must meet "Closed System" requirements, as defined in EN 61131-2 (without relying upon an external enclosure) in which an external Line Filter is used, it must be protected by a separate enclosure which meets the "finger safe" requirements of IEC 529, Class IP20. AC/DC Installation The following figure shows the detailed installation for the AC and DC powered systems for CE closed system compliance.
PAGE 796
Pwr. & Grnding. Guide Protective Cover The protective cover must completely enclose the line filter. Approximate dimensions for the cover are 12.5 cm by 7.5 cm. Wire entry/exit shall be through strain relief bushings. Line Filter Connections The following figure shows the wiring connections to the enclosed line filter.
PAGE 797
CableFast Cabling E At a Glance Introduction The following information pertains to the CableFast cabling system.
PAGE 798
CableFast Cabling Features of the CableFast Cabling System Overview The CableFast wiring system consists of pre-wired Quantum field wiring terminal strips, available in various cable lengths that are terminated with "D" type connectors. The "D" connectors plug into DIN rail-mounted terminal blocks offered in straight through or special application versions. Cables and terminal blocks are ordered separately and all terminal blocks may be used with any cable length.
PAGE 799
CableFast Cabling Specifications All CableFast systems are designed to the following specifications. Specifications Power Ratings 150 Vac/Vdc @ 0.5 A per point 150 Vac/Vdc @ 2.0 A per point * *Requires the 140CFG01600 Terminal Block and the 140XTS012XX Cable Dielectric Withstanding Voltage 1060 Vac and 1500 Vdc Creepage and Clearance per IEC 1131, UL 508, CSA 22.2 #142-1987 Terminal Block Wire Sizes per Terminal One wire - #12 AWG (2.5 mm2) Two wires - #16 AWG (1.
PAGE 800
CableFast Cabling X X 140ARI03010 X 140ATI03000 X (See Note 3) 140AMM09000 X 140AVI03000 X 140AVO02000 X 140DAI34000 X 140DAI35300 X 140DAI44000 X 140DAI45300 X 140DAI54000 X 140DAI54300 X 140DAI55300 X 140DAI74000 140CFG01600 140CFE03200 140CFE03200 140CFC03200 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X CableFast Not Allowed 140DAI75300 140DAM59000 X 140CFK00400 140ACI04000 140ACO13000 X 140CFJ00400 X 140CFI00800 X 140CFH00800 140ACI03000 140ACO02000 140CFB03
PAGE 801
140DAO85300 X (See Note 1) 140DDI15310 X 140DDI35300 X 140DDI35310 X 140DDI36400 140CFK00400 140CFJ00400 140CFI00800 140CFH00800 140CFG01600 140CFE03200 140CFE03200 140CFC03200 140CFB03200 140CFA04000 CableFast Cabling X X X Not compatible with CableFast. See 140DDI36400 I/O DC Input 24 VDC 6x16 Telefast Input Module, p.
PAGE 802
CableFast Cabling Note: These are the maximum load current capacities of the 140CFA04000 and CFG01600 terminal blocks: 1. When using the 140CFA04000 terminal block, the indicated module outputs are limited to 0.5 A per point, 150 Vac maximum and 0.5 A per point, 150 Vdc maximum. 2. When using the 140CFG01600 terminal block and either the 140XTS012xx or 140XTS102XX high power cables, the indicated module output ratings are 2 A per point, 150 Vac maximum, and 2 A per point, 150 Vdc maximum. 3.
PAGE 803
CableFast Cabling CableFast Terminal Blocks This table includes descriptions for the following terminal blocks. Block Number Block Description 140CFA04000 The A block is a straight through point to point connection on the terminal block. Wiring of this block is identical to wiring the Quantum I/O connector (140XTS00200). 140CFB03200 The B block is used for individually fused 2-wire digital inputs. This terminal block is designed to prevent a single point failure from affecting the remaining inputs.
PAGE 804
CableFast Cabling CableFast Terminal Block Features All CableFast terminal blocks have the following features. A standard 50 pin “D” connector. Marking label for Quantum backplane, module group, and/or slot information. UL component recognized. SHIELD CableFastTM 140 CFA 040 00 UL FILE E123528 Standard DIN rail mounting for quick installation. CableFast Terminal Block Stacking Convention Field side wiring terminals accommodate #12 AWG to #24 AWG (2.5 mm² to 0.2 mm²) wire.
PAGE 805
CableFast Cabling 140 CFA 040 00 Quantum CableFast Cabling Block Overview The A block is a straight-through point-to-point connection on the terminal block. Wiring this block (and other CableFast cabling blocks) is identical to wiring the Quantum I/O connector (140 XTS 002 00). 140 CFA 040 00 terminal block The following terminal block is unique to the 140 CFA 040 00 module.
PAGE 806
CableFast Cabling 140 CFA 040 00 Dimensions 2.3 in (58.4 mm) 4.5 in (114.3 mm) 3.0 in (76.2 mm) 806 35013379 02 October 2007 This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., Inc. 800-473-9123 www.barr-thorp.
PAGE 807
CableFast Cabling 140 CFA 040 00 Wiring Diagram 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 The wiring of the 140 CFA 040 00 block is identical to that of the 140 XTS 002 00 Quantum I/O connector. 18 Refer to the module wiring diagrams. 22 19 20 21 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 807 35013379 02 October 2007 This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., Inc. 800-473-9123 www.barr-thorp.
PAGE 808
CableFast Cabling 140 CFB 032 00 Quantum CableFast Cabling Block Overview The B block is used for individually fused 2-wire digital inputs. This CableFast terminal block is designed to prevent a single point failure from affecting the remaining inputs. It is not recommended for sourced 1-wire inputs (powered from the field). Terminal block The following figure shows the terminal block for the 140 CFB 032 00 module.
PAGE 809
CableFast Cabling Dimensions The following figures show the dimensions for the 140CFB03200 terminal block. VD+VC+ VB+VA+ VD-VC- VB-VA- 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 32+31+30 + 29+28+27+ 26+25+ 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 24+23+22+ 21+20+19+ 18+17+ 16+15+14+ 13+12+11+ 10+ 9+ 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 + 7+ 6+ 5 + 4 + 3+ 2+ 1+ 3.3 in (83.8 mm) 9.3 in (236.2 mm) 4.4 in (111.8 mm) 809 35013379 02 October 2007 This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., Inc. 800-473-9123 www.
PAGE 810
CableFast Cabling Wiring of input modules The following figure shows the 140 CFB 032 00 wiring for the following input modules: 140 DAI 353 00, 140 DAI 453 00, 140 DAI 553 00, 140 DDI 353 00, and 140 DDI 853 00. F1 0.
PAGE 811
CableFast Cabling Wiring of output module The following figure shows the 140 CFB 032 00 wiring for the 140 DDO 153 10 output module. Field side connections Module output 1 1+ 2 2+ Module output 4 3 3+ 4 4+ Module output 5 5 5+ 6 6+ 7 7+ 8 8+ F1 0.
PAGE 812
CableFast Cabling 140 CFC 032 00 Quantum CableFast Cabling Block Overview The C block provides connections for 32 group fused input or output points. You may use this CableFast terminal block for 1- or 2-wire inputs or outputs, and features a fuse per group – up to a total of four groups. Users select input or output mode via four switches located on the module. (The default is input mode.) Terminal block The following figure shows the terminal block for the 140 CFC 032 00 module.
PAGE 813
CableFast Cabling Application notes The following are the application notes for the 140 CFC 032 00 module: 1. Configuration – arranged in four groups of eight I/O points (two terminals per point). This block may be used for one- and two-wire inputs or outputs. The input and output mode is selected via four switches located on the block. 2. Compatibility – this terminal block provides 0.8 A group fusing for the following discrete modules: The following table shows the modules provided with 0.
PAGE 814
CableFast Cabling Wiring for input modules The following shows the 140 CFC 032 00 wiring for the following input modules: 140 DAI 353 00, 140 DAI 453 00, 140 DAI 553 00, 140 DDI 353 00, and 140 DDI 853 00. Field side connections Module input 9 Module input 10 FA Module B +/- Module Group B common Module - + FB 0.
PAGE 815
CableFast Cabling Wiring for 140 DDI 153 10 input module The following figure shows the 140 CFC 032 00 wiring for the 140 DDI 153 10 input module.
PAGE 816
CableFast Cabling Wiring for 140 DDO 153 10 output module The following figure shows the 140 CFC 032 00 wiring for the 140 DDO 153 10 output module.
PAGE 817
CableFast Cabling Note: 1. The 140 CFC 032 00 is shipped with Modicon the 140 CFU 080 00 (0.8 A) fuse installed. Check that the Modicon 140CFU40000 (4 A) fuse is installed when the 140 CFC 032 00 and the 140 DDO 153 00 are wired together. 2. The terminal block commoning strip, Modicon 140 CFX 001 10 (Qty. 10), can be used to jumper the power between groups. 817 35013379 02 October 2007 This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., Inc. 800-473-9123 www.barr-thorp.
PAGE 818
CableFast Cabling Wiring for 140 DDO 353 0X output module The following figure shows the 140 CFC 032 00 wiring for the 140 DDO 353 00 and 140 DDO 353 01 output modules.
PAGE 819
CableFast Cabling Note: 1. The 140 CFC 032 00 is shipped with the Modicon 140 CFU 080 00 (0.8 A) fuse installed. Make sure the Modicon 140 CFU 400 00 (4 A) fuse is installed when the 140 CFC 032 00 and the 140 DDO 353 00 are wired together. 2. The terminal block commoning strip, Modicon 140 CFX 001 10 (Qty. 10), can be used to jumper the power between groups. 819 35013379 02 October 2007 This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., Inc. 800-473-9123 www.barr-thorp.
PAGE 820
CableFast Cabling 140 CFD 032 00 Quantum CableFast Cabling Block Overview The CableFast cabling D block is used for sensors requiring either 2- or 3-wire electrical interfaces. A fuse per group is supplied to accommodate the I/O module (4) groups. Terminal block The following figure shows the 140 CFD 032 00 terminal block. CableFastTM 140 CFD 032 00 A SHIELD B C Application notes Dimensions UL FILE E123528 D The following are the application notes for the 140 CFD 032 00 module: 1.
PAGE 821
CableFast Cabling Wiring The following figure shows the wiring for the 140 CFD 032 00 module.
PAGE 822
CableFast Cabling 140 CFE 032 00 Quantum CableFast Cabling Block Overview The CableFast E cabling block provides connections for 32 individually fused 24 VDC outputs. 1- and 2-wire interfacing may be selected. Field power must be supplied to the four groups. Terminal block The following figure shows the 140 CFE 032 00 terminal block.
PAGE 823
CableFast Cabling Wiring diagram The following figure shows the wiring for the 140 CFE 032 00 module. Field side connections Module output 1 Module Output 9 F10 0.8A 9 9+/- 10 10+/- 11 11+/- 12 12+/- 13 13+/- 14 15 14+/15+/16+/- 17 17+/- 18 18+/- 19 19+/- 20 20+/- 21 21+/- 22 22+/- 23 23+/- 24 24+/- 25 25+/- 26 26+/27+/- 27 Module Group A supply Module Group B common Module Group B supply Fuse part numbers: Modicon# 140CFU08000 (Qty.
PAGE 824
CableFast Cabling 140 CFG 016 00 Quantum CableFast Cabling Block Overview The G CableFast cabling block is a high-power output block used on both AC and DC circuits requiring up to 2 A. Individual fusing is provided and may be used in both 1- and 2-wire installations. It is also used for isolated AC modules. Terminal block The following figure shows the 140 CFG 016 00 terminal block.
PAGE 825
CableFast Cabling Wiring for isolated AC input mode The following figure shows the 140 CFG 016 00 wiring for the input (isolated AC input mode) modules: 140 DAI 340 00, 140 DAI 440 00, and 140 DAI 540 00.
PAGE 826
CableFast Cabling Wiring for isolated output mode The following shows the 140 CFG 016 00 wiring for the 140 DAO 840 00 and 140 DAO 840 10 output modules (isolated output mode). F1 4A Module output 1 Module output 1 line Fuse part numbers Modicon # 140CFU40000 (Qty.
PAGE 827
CableFast Cabling Wiring for grouped AC output mode The following figure shows the 140 CFG 016 00 wiring for the 140 DAO 842 10 and 140 DAO 842 20 output modules (grouped AC output mode).
PAGE 828
CableFast Cabling Wiring for grouped DC output mode The following figure shows the 140 CFG 016 00 wiring for the 140 DDO 843 00 (grouped DC output mode) module.
PAGE 829
CableFast Cabling 140 CFH 008 00 Quantum CableFast Cabling Block Overview The H CableFast cabling block is used for analog inputs, with individual fusing provided per channel. This interface provides plus, minus, shield, and power supply interface for both field and loop power configurations. Terminal block The following figure shows the 140 CFH 008 00 terminal block.
PAGE 830
CableFast Cabling Dimensions The following figures show the dimensions for the 140 CFH 008 00 module. V4+ 4- 4+ S4 V3+3-3+ S3 V2+ 2- 2+S2-V1+ 1- 1+ S1 V+ RET GND V8+ 8- 8+ S8 V7+7-7+ S7 V6+ 6- 6+S6-V5+ 5- 5+ S5 2.3 in (58.4 mm) 5.0 in (127.0 mm) 830 3.0 in (76.2 mm) 35013379 02 October 2007 This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., Inc. 800-473-9123 www.barr-thorp.
PAGE 831
CableFast Cabling Wiring diagram (source grounding) The following figure shows the wiring for the 140 CFH 008 00 (source grounding) module.
PAGE 832
CableFast Cabling Note: 1. When using a single power supply, there will be no channel-to-channel isolation of input points. 2. For the required jumper options for the 140 ACI 030 00 and the 140 AVI 030 00, see the wiring diagrams for said modules. 3. The GND (ground) terminal point is not connected. 832 35013379 02 October 2007 This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., Inc. 800-473-9123 www.barr-thorp.
PAGE 833
CableFast Cabling Wiring diagram (instrument grounding) The following figure shows the wiring (instrument grounding) for the 140 CFH 008 00 module.
PAGE 834
CableFast Cabling Note: z If you use a single power supply, there will be no channel-to-channel isolation of the input points. z For the required jumper options for the 140 ACI 030 00 and the 140 AVI 030 00, see the wiring diagrams for said modules. z The GND (ground) terminal point is not connected. 834 35013379 02 October 2007 This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., Inc. 800-473-9123 www.barr-thorp.
PAGE 835
CableFast Cabling Wiring diagram (chassis grounding) The following figure shows the wiring (chassis grounding) for the 140 CFH 008 00 module.
PAGE 836
CableFast Cabling Note: 1. When using a single power supply, there will be no channel-to-channel isolation of input points. 2. For the required jumper options for the 140 ACI 030 00 and the 140 AVI 030 00, see the wiring diagrams for said modules. 3. The GND (ground) terminal point is not connected. 836 35013379 02 October 2007 This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., Inc. 800-473-9123 www.barr-thorp.
PAGE 837
CableFast Cabling 140CFI00800 Quantum CableFast Cabling Block Overview The I block is used for analog inputs. This interface provides plus, minus, shield, and power supply interfaces for both field and loop power configurations. See Features of the CableFast Cabling System, p. 798 for information on common specifications and features of CableFast cabling blocks.
PAGE 838
CableFast Cabling Wiring Diagram (Source Grounding) The following figure shows the wiring for the140CFI00800 (source grounding) module.
PAGE 839
CableFast Cabling Note: 1. When using a single power supply, there will be no channel-to-channel isolation of input points. 2. For the required jumper options for the 140ACI03000 and the 140AVI03000, see the wiring diagrams in 140ACI03000 I/O Analog In Module, p. 524 and 140AVI03000 I/O Analog IN 8 Channel Bipolar Module, p. 540. 3. The GND (ground) terminal point is not connected. 839 35013379 02 October 2007 This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., Inc. 800-473-9123 www.barr-thorp.
PAGE 840
CableFast Cabling Wiring Diagram (Instrument Grounding) The following figure shows the wiring for the140CFI00800 (instrument grounding) module.
PAGE 841
CableFast Cabling Note: 1. When using a single power supply, there will be no channel-to-channel isolation of input points. 2. For the required jumper options for the 140ACI03000 and the 140AVI03000, see the wiring diagrams in 140ACI03000 I/O Analog In Module, p. 524 and 140AVI03000 I/O Analog IN 8 Channel Bipolar Module, p. 540. 3. The GND (ground) terminal point is not connected. 841 35013379 02 October 2007 This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., Inc. 800-473-9123 www.barr-thorp.
PAGE 842
CableFast Cabling Wiring Diagram (Chassis Grounding) The following figure shows the wiring for the 140CFI00800 (chassis grounding) module.
PAGE 843
CableFast Cabling Note: 1. When using a single power supply, there will be no channel-to-channel isolation of input points. 2. For the required jumper options for the 140ACI03000 and the 140AVI03000, see the wiring diagrams in 140ACI03000 I/O Analog In Module, p. 524 and 140AVI03000 I/O Analog IN 8 Channel Bipolar Module, p. 540 . 3. The GND (ground) terminal point is not connected. 843 35013379 02 October 2007 This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., Inc. 800-473-9123 www.barr-thorp.
PAGE 844
CableFast Cabling 140CFJ00400 Quantum CableFast Cabling Block Overview The J block is used for analog outputs, with individual fusing provided per channel. This interface provides plus, minus, shield, and power supply interfaces for both field and loop power configurations. See Features of the CableFast Cabling System, p. 798 for information on common specifications and features of CableFast cabling blocks. Terminal Block The following figure shows the 140CFJ00400 terminal block.
PAGE 845
CableFast Cabling Dimensions The following figures show the dimensions for the 140CFJ00400 module. 2-V2-V2+ C02 V02 S2 1-V1-V1+ C01 V01 S1 V+ RET GND 4-V4-V4+ C04 V04 S4 3-V3-V3+ C03 V03 S3 2.3 in (58.4 mm) 4.3 in (109.2 3.0 in (76.2 mm) 845 35013379 02 October 2007 This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., Inc. 800-473-9123 www.barr-thorp.
PAGE 846
CableFast Cabling Wiring Diagram (Source Grounding) The following figure shows the wiring for the 140CFJ00400 (source grounding) module.
PAGE 847
CableFast Cabling Note: 1. When using a single power supply, there will be no channel-to-channel isolation of input points. 2. For the required jumper options for the 140ACO02000, see the wiring diagrams in ACO02000 Wiring Diagram, p. 552. 3. The GND (ground) terminal point is not connected. 847 35013379 02 October 2007 This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., Inc. 800-473-9123 www.barr-thorp.
PAGE 848
CableFast Cabling Wiring Diagram (Instrument Grounding) The following figure shows the wiring for the140CFJ00400 (instrument grounding) module.
PAGE 849
CableFast Cabling Note: 1. When using a single power supply, there will be no channel-to-channel isolation of input points. 2. For the required jumper options for the 140ACO02000, see the wiring diagrams in ACO02000 Wiring Diagram, p. 552. 3. The GND (ground) terminal point is not connected. 849 35013379 02 October 2007 This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., Inc. 800-473-9123 www.barr-thorp.
PAGE 850
CableFast Cabling Wiring Diagram (Chassis Grounding) The following figure shows the wiring for the 140CFJ00400 (chassis grounding) module.
PAGE 851
CableFast Cabling Note: 1. When using a single power supply, there will be no channel-to-channel isolation of input points. 2. For the required jumper options for the 140ACO02000, see the wiring diagrams in ACO02000 Wiring Diagram, p. 552. 3. The GND (ground) terminal point is not connected. 851 35013379 02 October 2007 This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., Inc. 800-473-9123 www.barr-thorp.
PAGE 852
CableFast Cabling 140CFK00400 Quantum CableFast Cabling Block Overview The K block is used for analog outputs. This interface provides plus, minus, shield, and power supply interface for both field and loop power configurations. See Features of the CableFast Cabling System, p. 798 for information on common specifications and features of CableFast cabling blocks. Terminal Block The following figure shows the 140CFK00400 terminal block.
PAGE 853
CableFast Cabling Dimensions The following figures show the dimensions for the 140CFK00400 module. 2-V2-V2+ C02 V02 S2 1-V1-V1+ C01 V01 S1 V+ RET GND 4-V4-V4+ C04 V04 S4 3-V3-V3+ C03 V03 S3 2.3 in (58.4 mm) 4.3 in (109.2 mm) 3.0 in (76.2 mm) 853 35013379 02 October 2007 This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., Inc. 800-473-9123 www.barr-thorp.
PAGE 854
CableFast Cabling Wiring Diagram (Source Grounding) The following shows the wiring for the 140CFK00400 (source grounding) module.
PAGE 855
CableFast Cabling Note: 1. When used with the 140AVO02000 analog voltage out module, the master override connections and range select must be made on the Quantum I/O connector. 2. When using a single power supply, there will be no channel-to-channel isolation of input points. 3. For the required jumper options for the 140ACO02000, see wiring diagram in 140ACO02000 Quantum I/O Analog Current Out Module, p. 550. 4. The GND (ground) terminal point is not connected.
PAGE 856
CableFast Cabling Wiring Diagram (Instrument Grounding) The following figure shows the wiring for the 140CFK00400 (instrument grounding) module.
PAGE 857
CableFast Cabling Note: 1. When used with the 140AVO02000 analog voltage out module, the master override connections and range select must be made on the Quantum I/O connector. 2. When using a single power supply, there will be no channel-to-channel isolation of input points. 3. For the required jumper options for the 140ACO02000 and the AVO02000, see wiring diagrams in 140ACO02000 Quantum I/O Analog Current Out Module, p. 550 and the 140AVO02000 Quantum I/O Analog Voltage Out Module, p. 558. 4.
PAGE 858
CableFast Cabling Wiring Diagram (Chassis Grounding) The following shows the wiring for the 140CFK00400 (chassis grounding) module.
PAGE 859
CableFast Cabling Note: 1. When used with the 140AVO02000 analog voltage out module, the master override connections and range select must be made on the Quantum I/O connector. 2. When using a single power supply, there will be no channel-to-channel isolation of input points. 3. For wiring the 140ACO02000 and the 140AVO02000, see the wiring diagrams in 140ACO02000 Quantum I/O Analog Current Out Module, p. 550 and 140AVO02000 Quantum I/O Analog Voltage Out Module, p. 558. 4.
PAGE 860
CableFast Cabling CableFast Cables Overview This section provides CableFast cable specifications, cable lengths, inner wire color codes (for standard and high power cables), cable selections, and accessories. Cable Specifications The following table shows the CableFast cable specifications. Cable Specifications Standard Power Cable Diameter Number of Conductors Bend Radius (I.D.) 0.43 in. nominal (10.9 mm) 8-#20 AWG (0.8 mm), 7/28 tinned annealed copper; semi rigid PVC 32-#26 AWG (0.
PAGE 861
CableFast Cabling Cable Lengths The following table shows the cable lengths for the CableFast system. Cable Lengths Terminated Pigtail Standard Power High Power 3 ft. (0.91 m) X X 6 ft. (1.82 m) X X 9 ft. (2.73 m) X X 12 ft. (3.64 m) X X High Power X 15 ft. (4.6 m) Inner Wire Color Codes X The following table provides the wire color codes for standard power and high power cables.
PAGE 862
CableFast Cabling Cable Selections (XTS) Part Number The following table shows the 140XTS0xx terminated cables. Cable Type Standard Power 140XTS00203 Cable Description High Power X 140XTS01203 140XTS00206 X CableFast system cable with Quantum I/O connector, 3 ft. (0.9 m) and "D" sub connector X CableFast system cable with Quantum I/O connector, 6 ft. (1.8 m) and "D" sub connector X CableFast system cable with Quantum I/O connector, 9 ft. (2.
PAGE 863
CableFast Cabling Pigtail Leads The following figure shows the color coded pigtail leads. 40 Color Coded Pigtail Leads 50-pin “D” Connector See cable lengths in the above table. XTS102xx Pigtail Part Number The following table shows the 140XTS102xx Pigtail cables. Cable Type Cable Description Standard Power High Power 140XTS10206 X CableFast system cable with Quantum I/O connector, 6 ft. (1.8 m), and pigtail cable 140 XTS10215 X CableFast system cable with Quantum I/O connector, 15 ft. (4.
PAGE 864
CableFast Cabling CableFast Accessories Overview The following information pertains to the CableFast accessories. Accessories The following table shows the part numbers and descriptions for CableFast Accessories. Part Number Description Quantity 140CFU40000 Fuse Kit, Wickmann 4 A 10 140CFU08000 Fuse Kit, Wickmann 0.8 A 10 140CFU00600 Fuse Kit, Wickmann 0.
PAGE 865
Error Stopped Codes F Error Stopped Codes Overview The following is a list of error stopped codes and their definitions. Error Stopped Codes The following is a list of error stopped codes for the Quantum system.
PAGE 866
Error Stpd. Codes Definitions for Error Stopped Codes The following are definitions for Error Stopped Codes. z z z z z z z z z z z PLC unhealthy: This condition indicates that the CPU has failed one or more of its health diagnostics. In all probability the CPU will have to be replaced. PLC stopped: By itself, an 8000 hex is not an error but a CPU state. If, for example, a user issues a CPU stop command, the status register would indicate "8000" hex.
PAGE 867
Error Stpd. Codes z z z z z z Bad coil used table: This error means that the coil used table does not match user logic. Possible causes include: 1. This error is often seen when a program is altered offline by non-Modsoft users and then reloaded. It may be neccesary to update the coil used table manually in order to recover from this error. 2. The battery coil is not configured or configured in correctly. This error is not uncommon if the program is being relocated from another PLC. 3.
PAGE 868
Error Stpd. Codes 868 35013379 02 October 2007 This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., Inc. 800-473-9123 www.barr-thorp.
PAGE 869
Agency Approvals G Agency Approvals Overview The following tables provide the agency approvals and also include the conformal coating availability of the indicated Quantum products. Power Supplies The following table provides the agency approvals and conformal coating availability for the power supplies of the indicated Quantum products.
PAGE 870
Agency Approvals CPUs The following table provides the agency approvals and conformal coating availability for the CPUs of the indicated Quantum products. Quantum Part Numbers Conformally Agency Approval Status Coated Version UL 508 CSA 22.
PAGE 871
Agency Approvals RIO Heads and Drops The following table provides the agency approvals and conformal coating availability for the RIO Heads and Drops of the indicated Quantum products. Quantum Part Numbers Conformally Coated Version Availabilty UL 508 CSA 22.
PAGE 872
Agency Approvals NOEs The following table provides the agency approvals and conformal coating availability for the NOEs of the indicated Quantum products. Quantum Part Numbers Conformally Agency Approval Status Coated Version UL 508 CSA 22.
PAGE 873
Agency Approvals Counters The following table provides the agency approvals and conformal coating availability for the Counters of the indicated Quantum products Quantum Part Numbers Conformally Coated Version Availabilty UL 508 CSA 22.
PAGE 874
Agency Approvals Simulators Quantum Part Numbers The following table provides the agency approvals and conformal coating availability for the Simulators of the indicated Quantum products Conformally Coated Version Availabilty Agency Approval Status UL 508 CSA 22.
PAGE 875
Agency Approvals I/O The following table provides the agency approvals and conformal coating availability for the I/O of the indicated Quantum products Quantum Part Numbers Conformally Coated Version Availabilty UL 508 CSA 22.
PAGE 876
Agency Approvals Quantum Part Numbers Conformally Coated Version Availabilty Agency Approval Status UL 508 CSA 22.
PAGE 877
Agency Approvals Backplane Expander The following table provides the agency approvals and conformal coating availability for the backplane expander of the indicated Quantum products Quantum Part Numbers Conformally Coated Version Availabilty UL 508 CSA 22.2-142 C-UL Factory Mutual Class I, Div 2 CE 140XBE10000 √ √ √ √ √ √ Maritime Approvals Agency Approval Status CSA Class I, Div 2 The following talbe provides maritime approvals for selected group of modules. Check www.modicon.
PAGE 878
Agency Approvals 878 35013379 02 October 2007 This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., Inc. 800-473-9123 www.barr-thorp.
PAGE 879
B AC Index Numerics 140 CFA 040 00 application notes, 805 description, 805 dimensions, 806 terminal block illustration, 805 wiring diagram, 807 140 CFB 032 00 application notes, 808 description, 808 terminal block illustration, 808 wiring for input modules, 810 140 CFC 032 00 wiring diagram for 140 DDI 353 00, 814 140 CFC 032 00 application notes, 813 description, 812 dimensions, 813 terminal block illustration, 812 wiring diagram for 140 DAI 353 00, 814 wiring diagram for 140 DAI 453 00, 814 wiring diagr
PAGE 880
Index 140 CFH 008 00 application notes, 829 description, 829 dimensions, 830 terminal block illustration, 829 wiring diagram (chassis grounding), 835 wiring diagram (instrument grounding), 833 wiring diagram (source grounding), 831 A ACI03000 configuration, 507 description, 524 I/O map status byte, 509 register assignment, 508 specifications, 524 wiring diagram, 526 ACI04000 description, 528 I/O map status byte, 511 module zoom selections, 511 register assignment, 510 specifications, 529 wiring diagram, 5
PAGE 881
Index AII33010 configuration, 427 description, 446 field wiring, 447 fixed wiring, 447 map status byte (inputs), 428 module zoom selections, 428 register assignment, 428 specifications, 446 terminal strip color and keying assignment, 447 wiring diagram (Cenelec), 448 wiring diagram (CSA), 449 wiring diagram (FM), 450 wiring diagram (UL), 451 AIO33000 configuration, 429 description, 452 field wiring, 454 fixed wiring system, 454 I/O map status byte, 429 module zoom selections, 430 register assignments, 429
PAGE 882
Index backplanes four position, 761 mounting hardware specifications, 758 part numbers, 758 selecting, 758 six position, 762 sixteen position, 764 ten position, 763 three position, 760 two positions, 759 battery module XCP90000, 485 bus configuration, 302 C CableFast cable lengths, 861 cable selections (XTS), 862 cable specifications, 860 description, 798 I/O connector for Quantum, 862 I/O connector illustration, 863 inner wire color codes, 861 quantum modules and backplane illustration, 798 specification
PAGE 883
Index CPS11100 description, 72 illustration, 72 LED description, 74 LED indicator, 74 wiring diagram, 74 CPS11100 (PV01 or greater) description, 75 illustration, 75 LED description, 77 LED indicator, 77 wiring diagram, 77 CPS11400 description, 78 illustration, 78 LED description, 80 LED indicators, 80 specifications, 79 wiring diagram, 80 CPS11410 description, 81 illustration, 81 LED description, 83 LED indicator, 83 specifications, 82 wiring diagram, 83 CPS11420 description, 84 illustration, 84 LED descri
PAGE 884
Index CPS51100 description, 108 illustration, 108 LED description, 109 LED indicator, 109 specifications, 109 wiring diagram, 110 CPS52400 description, 111 illustration, 111 LED description, 113 LED indicators, 113 specifications, 112 wiring diagram, 113 CPU description, 20 hardware specifications, 62 part numbers, 62 CPU11302 ASCII communication port parameters, 123 description, 128 front panel switches, 123 illustration, 117 LED descriptions, 120 LED error codes, 121 LED indicators, 120 Modbus connector
PAGE 885
Index port parameters, 156 description, 150 front panel switches, 156 illustration, 150 LED descriptions, 153 LED error codes, 154 LED indicators, 153 Modbus connector pinouts, 159 Modbus ports pinout connections, 159 Modbus ports pinout connections for portable computers, 160 rear panel switches, 158 RTU communication port parameters, 156 specifications, 151 SW1 and SW2 address settings, 158 SW1 and SW2 switches, 158 valid communication port parameters, 157 CPU43412, 167 ASCII comm port parameters, 167 de
PAGE 886
Index port parameters, 207 description, 200 front panel slide switch, 207 illustration, 200 key switch, 209 LED descriptions, 203 LED error codes, 204 LED indicators, 203 Modbus connector pinouts, 211 Modbus ports pinout connections, 212 Modbus ports pinout connections for portable computers, 213 rear panel switches, 211 RTU communication port parameters, 207 specifications, 201 SW1 and SW2 address settings, 211 valid communication port parameters, 208 CPU53414B ASCII communication port parameters, 221 des
PAGE 887
Index D DAI34000 description, 579 specifications, 579 wiring diagram, 581 DAI35300 description, 582 specifications, 582 wiring diagram, 584 DAI44000 description, 585 specifications, 585 wiring diagram, 587 DAI45300 description, 588 specifications, 588 wiring diagram, 590 DAI54000 description, 591 specifications, 591 wiring diagram, 593 DAI54300 description, 594 specifications, 594 wiring diagram, 596 DAI55300 description, 598 specifications, 598 wiring diagram, 600 DAI74000 description, 602 specifications,
PAGE 888
Index DDI67300 description, 620 minimum version levels, 623 specifications, 621 wiring diagram, 624 DDI84100 description, 626 specifications, 627 wiring diagram, 628 DDI85300 description, 629 specifications, 630 wiring diagram, 631 DDM39000 common specifications, 729 description, 727 fuse locations, 730 input specifications, 727 output specifications, 728 topology, 727 wiring diagram, 732 DDM69000 common specifications, 736 description, 734 I/O map register (outputs), 717 I/O map status byte (outputs), 718
PAGE 889
Index DIO33000 description, 468 specifications, 468 terminal strip color and keying assignment, 469 wiring diagram (Cenelec), 470 wiring diagram (CSA), 471 wiring diagram (FM), 472 wiring diagram (UL), 473 direct CPU driver network interface techniques, 47 discrete I/O true high illustration, 503 discrete I/O true low illustration, 503 discrete input (16-point) modules description, 575 module zoom selections, 575 register assignments, 575 discrete input (24-point) modules description, 575 I/O map register
PAGE 890
Index E EHC10500 description, 336 illustration, 336 LED descriptions, 339 LED indicators, 339 specifications, 337 wiring diagram, 340 EHC20200 3x register content, 356 Command 1, 343 Command 1 and Command 2 response formats, 351 Command 2, 344 Command 3, 344 Command 3 read input counter, 351 Command 3 response format, 352 Command 4, 344 Command 4 output register format, 352 Command 4 response format, 353 configuration, 342 COUNT DOWN example, 358 counting pulses, 380 description, 372 fuse location, 375 I/O
PAGE 891
Index F fiber optic cable cable types, 308 connecting, 301 ports, 300 repairing, 310 termination kits, 307 tools, 308 fiber optic network adding nodes, 309 bus configuration, 302 calculating number of modules, 310 point-to-point configuration, 302 self healing ring configuration, 305 tree configuration, 304 fuses description, 755 H hardware specifications ASCII interface module, 64 counter modules, 64 CPU, 62 description, 61 DIO heads/drops, 63 Ethernet modules, 63 field bus modules, 62 high speed interru
PAGE 892
Index position codes, 501 terminal strip key codes, 499 terminal strip/module keying, 498 intelligent/special purpose I/O modules description, 25 InterBus communication module NOA6XXXX, 242 InterBus interface modules communication interface modules, 24 Intrinsically safe analog input module AII33000, 431 intrinsically safe analog output module AIO33000, 452 intrinsically safe current input module AII33010, 446 intrinsically safe discrete input module DII33000, 462 intrinsically safe discrete output module
PAGE 893
Index procedure, 773 illustration, 771 installing jumper clips, 772 removing Quantum module door, 774 mounting brackets 125 mm, 766 20 mm, 767 description, 765 part numbers, 765 MSB10100 MSX10100, 398 MSC10100 MSX10100, 398 MSX motion modules MSX10100, 398 MSX10100 analog input (electrical specifications), 402 analog input (operational specifications), 400 analog output (electrical specifications), 402 analog output (operational specifications), 401 application program (operational specifications), 399 com
PAGE 894
Index NOA6XXXX comparison of features, 249 description, 242 front panel conncections, 246 illustration, 242 InterBus port, 247 specifications, 243 NOE2X100 description, 312 illustration, 312 installation, 313 installation example, 314 LED descriptions, 313 LED indicators, 313 specifications, 312 NOE3X100 description, 315 illustration, 315 LED descriptions, 317 specifications, 316 SY/MAX addressing, 317 NOE5X100 description, 318 illustration, 318 LED descriptions, 320 LED indicators, 320 specifications, 319
PAGE 895
Index portable computers, 290 rear panel switches, 286 RTU comm port parameters, 287 specifications, 282 SW1 and SW2 address settings, 286 valid comm port parameters, 288 NOM25200 adding nodes, 309 address settings, 297 ASCII comm port parameters, 295 bus configuration, 302 cables, 308 calculating modules in a fiber network, 310 comm port parameters, 296 connecting, 301, 309 description, 291 fiber optic cable ports, 300 fiber optic configurations, 302 front panel switches, 295 hot standby systems example,
PAGE 896
Index Q S Quantum Automation Series block diagram, 18 capabilities, 18 Quantum configurations description, 32 distributed I/O, 32 local I/O, 32 remote I/O, 32 Quantum editors description, 28 Quantum network support description, 44 supported networks, 45 Quantum simulator modules description, 26 self healing ring configuration, 305 signal descriptions EHC20200, 384 single cable configuration RIO, 35 RIO in a Hot Standby configuration, 37 spare parts description, 754 R redundant power supplies descriptio
PAGE 897
Index specifications ACI03000, 524 ACI04000, 529 ACO02000, 550 ACO13000, 554 AII33010, 446 AIO33000, 453 ARI030010, 532 ATI03000, 536 AVI03000, 540 AVO02000, 558 CableFast, 799 CHS11000, 414 CPS11100, 73 CPS11100 (PV01 or greater), 76 CPS11400, 79, 103 CPS11410, 82 CPS11420, 85 CPS12400, 88 CPS12420, 91 CPS21100, 94 CPS21400, 97 CPS22400, 100 CPS42400, 106 CPS51100, 109 CPS52400, 112 CPU11302, 118 CPU11303, 129 CPU21304, 140 CPU42402, 151 CPU43412, 162 CPU43412A, 175 CPU53414, 189 CPU53414A, 201 CPU53414B,
PAGE 898
Index summable power supplies description, 788 system configurations local, RIO, and DIO, 32 system space requirements dimensions, 768 illustration, 769 locations, 768 minimum spacing, 768 system specifications AC/DC power supplies, 56 agency approvals, 58 description, 55 electrical, 55 I/O modules (between 24 and 48 Vac or Vdc), 56 I/O modules (greater than 48 Vac or Vdc), 56 I/O modules (less than 24 Vac or Vdc), 56 mechanical, 55 operating conditions, 57 storage conditions, 57 T Telefast Input DDI36400
PAGE 899
Index DAI74000, 604 DAI75300, 607 DAM59000, 725 DAO84000, 642 DAO84010, 647, 652 DAO84220, 657 DAO85300, 662 DDI15310, 610 DDI35300, 612 DDI35310, 615 DDI67300, 624 DDI84110, 628 DDI85300, 631 DDM39000, 732 DDM69000, 738 DDO15310, 667 DDO35300, 671 DDO35301, 675 DDO35310, 679 DDO84300, 688 DDO88500, 692 DII33000, 464 DIO33000, 470 DRA84000, 695 DRC83000, 698 DSI35300, 714 DVO85300, 709 EHC10500, 340 EHC20200, 362, 385 HLI34000, 396 intrinsically safe modules, 421 XSM01000, 481 XCP90000 battery backup, 486
PAGE 900
Index 900 35013379 02 October 2007 This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., Inc. 800-473-9123 www.barr-thorp.